Home

R&S FSW-K76/-K77 TD-SCDMA User Manual

1. INPUt SELEG e INSTrament GREate DUPLICE oirein er reete erret AEAEE N NESEN 130 INSTrument CREate REPLace E INSTrument CREate NEW 2 rtr erri rin terre irre rh reb ke th eror rer Rea ee EC Rd A E ER eae a INS Tumen BE c c X INS Tr ment E za e a e a a Ta aa N red E 131 INS Tr mebt RE NAITIG oie e AAO RETRE NENAS ATOE EG E FERA EXER A TEE SOTEN 132 INS Tr mient SELEC reos cerner torneo ede ees HERE rs xr Str cone era ra xerP EN EY AVE RAE EXTR SRL eH IRE FUN SUP NEE canton 133 EAYOUUADDEWINDOW ctt etate n D ctp eere ctt d e ED c oer reas 183 LAYout CATalog WINDow 185 LAY Out IDEN ty Br Bose 185 EAYout REMove WINBOYWg rentrer rnt rne ret nere eene rer eee ren teresa 185 EAYout REPLace WINDOW sirisser irrar rro tet rr eere tra Fere rh HR e Eee eue 186 DENOUNCES e mesure 186 EAYOUtWINDOWSnDS AIDD i e ctae tacet p noe prp ad E ne d e E v HR Ee ud 188 LAY out WINDOWSnSIBENIT ii creer v a tiene e e ee tete Erie et ur vR copa T 188 LAYout WINDow lt n gt REMove LAYout WINDowsr REBLAC6 rares ee tp eer ip cp te o Ded pee cen A den hed MMEMoOry EOAD IQ STATe ceto eto rore t rre tenir repre vore re kk E PER e ERE XY EE
2. 137 INPUEIM PEGA NC Covina ei eorr RE eig ee Der Su a exa eco pea ra sceticacinsctaaeaduanceastaae ET 137 EES E e T 138 INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet This command resets the attenuator and reconnects the RF input with the input mixer after an overload condition occured and the protection mechanism intervened The error status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register and the INPUT OVLD message in the status bar are cleared The command works only if the overload condition has been eliminated first Usage Event INPut CONNector lt ConnType gt Determines whether the RF input data is taken from the RF input connector or the optional Analog Baseband connector This command is only available if the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B71 is installed and active for input It is not available for the R amp S FSW67 or R amp S FSW85 For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual Parameters lt ConnType gt RF RF input connector AIQI Analog Baseband connector RST RF Example INP CONN AIQI Selects the analog baseband input Usage SCPI confirmed Configuring Code Domain Analysis Manual operation See Input Connector on page 57 INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt This command selects the coupling type of the RF input The command is not available for m
3. Retrieve the trace data of the Peak Code Domain Error measurement TRAC2 DATA TRACE1 Result 0 000000000 6 730751038E 001 1 000000000 6 687619019E 001 2 000000000 6 728615570E 001 Table 10 11 Trace results for Peak Code Domain Error measurement Slot number Peak Error 0 6 730751038E 001 1 6 687619019E 001 2 6 728615570E 001 10 15 7 Measurement 7 Checking the Power vs Time This example demonstrates how to check the signal power in the time domain against a transmission power mask defined by the TD SCDMA specification in a remote envi ronment for details see Power vs Time on page 31 ffe Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Activate a TD SCDMA BTS measurement channel named BTSMeasurement INST CRE NEW BTDS BTSMeasurement Set the center frequency to 2 1175 GHz FREQ CENT 2 1175 GHz Programming Examples TD SCDMA BTS Select the power vs time measurement CONF CDP MEAS PVT fesses Configuring the measurement Set the switching point to 2 to analyze downlink data in slots 3 to 7 CONF CDP PVT SPO 2 Set the number of subframes to average to 50 CONF CDP PVT SFR 50 Automatically set the reference level and trigger to frame values according to measured levels and time SENS POW ACH AUTO LTIM Add a second measurement window for the list evaluation LAY ADD 1 BEL LEV
4. Retrieve the trace data of the composite EVM measurementTRAC2 DATA TRACE1 Result 0 000000000 5 876136422E 001 1 000000000 5 916179419E 001 2 000000000 5 949081182E 001 ll less Table 10 10 Trace results for Composite EVM measurement CPICH Slot number EVM 0 5 876136422E 001 1 5 916179419E 001 2 5 949081182E 001 Measurement 6 Determining the Peak Code Domain Error fes Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Activate a TD SCDMA BTS measurement channel named BTSMeasurement INST CRE NEW BTDS BTSMeasurement Set the reference level to 10 dBm DISP TRAC Y SCAL RLEV 10 Set the center frequency to 2 1175 GHz Programming Examples TD SCDMA BTS FREQ CENT 2 1175 GHz I92 22 Configuring the measurement Set the trigger source to the external trigger TRIGGER INPUT connector TRIG SOUR EXT Replace the second measurement window Result Summary by the Peak Code Domain Error evaluation LAY REPL 2 PCD Optimize the scaling of the y axis for the Composite EVM measurement DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL AUTO ONCE ff5925e9m9 m Performing the measurement Stops continuous sweep INIT CONT OFF Sets the number of sweeps to be performed to 10 SWE COUN 10 Start a new measurement with 10 sweeps and wait for the end INIT WAI 992 2 2 Retrieving results
5. 37 List EVSIDISU DT cesset scis te ru aia ERE Recte roster eie um adv a epe Eb dua Pe Rua Pr ene ANS EG 38 Result SUMMA oai cereo riae Varied ERE SEU curia duce epit eae ee 38 Markor Table rette teri ree eet e el eh eaa ee tr eee iai deb staan c de s c d 39 Marker Peak LISL teer eee ena tenera er ea S Cua ede Dn a Feckre ck todo ge arre oua T T V pecia r KAY POUR 39 Diagram Displays a basic level vs frequency or level vs time diagram of the measured data to evaluate the results graphically This is the default evaluation method Which data is displayed in the diagram depends on the Trace settings Scaling for the y axis can be configured mm CEP E ME UU MACC SS NUUS NS User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 37 R amp S FSW K76 K77 Measurements and Result Display ics NER c Y Tsms sr N ri meca i H d w J d M Bw CF 1 95 GHz 1001 pts 2 57 MHz Span 25 7 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH DIAG see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 183 List Evaluation The list evaluation provides the numerical results for the Power vs Time measure ment 2 List Evaluation Start op Ave Max Time MaxPower ns dBm 3 ns The List Evaluation displays the following information Column Description Start Stop Start and stop time of the individual time intervals of the Emission Envelo
6. ssesssse 92 Displ yedi rrt rrr rr nre ns 11 Symbols Bits depending on modulation Depending on spreading factor 2 PON SIOE e H Sync settings Phase reference eerte teet ceres 86 Tim reference sett rte n rta 86 Sync To Pliase Gference ie oret n ierat 167 Sync settings UE aeaiee aiana 166 Synchronization GConfiguling ucro rte t etit rers Remote control Scramblirig Gode eerie etre 85 ecl Y 85 Synnchronization Phase reference remote ssssssss 165 T TAE Configuration remote sicriu iniii 134 TD SCDMA BASICS m Frequency domain measurements Measurements Remote control TD SCDMA mode Programming examples sees 228 Threshold Active channels eite eire torret hd cre ORRE 168 Channel POWER 5 reca esteet iren te pne one ras done Pt 42 Time reference SYNC SENGS etcetera orco ene oci Deoa 86 Rezept T T 15 Traces Configuration remote sssseen 213 Configuration softkey Exporting FEMOtE iriiria ce 208 un p n 112 Mode remote 4 erret tci tnter necs 213 Results remote siunannut narine a 200 Transmit ON OFF power mask eeeee 31 Trigger Configuration remote sssee 156 Configuration softkey ss
7. 155 dass 155 INPUEERT TIS TANT sort ea eee Re ere e e eee tediba Eo va rad ux eoa die Qux aaO ui ee aD reu 156 INPut ATTenuation lt Attenuation gt This command defines the total attenuation for RF input If an electronic attenuator is available and active the command defines a mechanical attenuation see TNPut EATT STATe on page 156 If you set the attenuation manually it is no longer coupled to the reference level but the reference level is coupled to the attenuation Thus if the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level This function is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active Parameters lt Attenuation gt Range see data sheet Increment 5 dB RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Defines a 30 dB attenuation and decouples the attenuation from the reference level Configuring Code Domain Analysis Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 72 INPut ATTenuation AUTO State This command couples or decouples the attenuation to the reference level Thus when the reference level is changed the R amp S FSW determines the signal level for optimal internal data processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly This function is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active Parameters State
8. sess 59 Connected IMS tume ME eco cita eter ne rx etel o ined tan dne ec pe de e ER e ne nde dia uus 59 BIB M OO rte 59 Digital I Q Input State Enables or disable the use of the Digital IQ input source for measurements Digital IQ is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Remote command INPut SELect on page 138 Input Sample Rate Defines the sample rate of the digital I Q signal source This sample rate must corre spond with the sample rate provided by the connected device e g a generator If Auto is selected the sample rate is adjusted automatically by the connected device Code Domain Analysis The allowed range is from 100 Hz to 10 GHz Remote command INPut DIQ SRATe on page 141 INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO on page 141 Full Scale Level The Full Scale Level defines the level and unit that should correspond to an I Q sam ple with the magnitude 1 If Auto is selected the level is automatically set to the value provided by the connec ted device Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer on page 141 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT on page 141 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO on page 140 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level If enabled the reference level is adjusted to the full scale level automatically if any change occurs Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling on page 140 Connected Instrument Displ
9. Parameter Default Value Span Zero Span Sweep Time 2 4 ms RBW 1 28 MHz VBW 10 MHz Trace Mode Average Switching point 3 BTS application only Number of subframes 100 PvT Configuration Overview For Power vs Time measurements the Overview provides quick access to the follow ing configuration dialog boxes listed in the recommended order of processing The Signal Description Signal Capture and Channel Detection buttons indicated in the Overview are not available for TD SCDMA Power vs Time measurements Select Measurement See chapter 3 Measurements and Result Display on page 13 Input Frontend See chapter 6 2 2 Data Input and Output Settings on page 54 Optionally Trigger See chapter 6 2 4 Trigger Settings on page 77 Synchronization See chapter 6 2 7 Synchronization on page 85 Analysis See chapter 7 Analysis on page 108 Display Configuration See chapter 6 1 Result Display Configuration on page 50 Frequency and Time Domain Measurements 0 6 3 1 3 The Span Lines and Marker Functions menus are not available for Power vs Time measurements in TD SCDMA applications To configure settings P Select any button in the Overview to open the corresponding dialog box Select a setting in the channel bar at the top of the measurement channel tab to change a specific setting Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lef
10. eseessssssssssssssessee eee eene enne ennt enn renr en trnnn nnne GALCulate n MARKer m MINimump PEAK enitn rne ront tnter CAL Culatesns MARKGESInPX eiconsectet e Eoo E NE t e bd RERE TETEE 215 CAL Culate lt m gt MARKGISIM SiN 212 GALGulatesn MARKer m STATe6 ccrte kr trennen rrt teet t nent pr er eun 214 CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe SHOW GAL Culatesp MSRACALINSEVALUe crecer rrr run pane nE oorr et xh Pe RE e NEETER e sar vcr du 223 GALGulate n MSRA WINDow n IMAL uiie tnr notte enn terr rr tren hn hene ERE rua a gs 223 GALGulate sn STATistics RESUlt E rtt erre rrr tnter ero FH X HE RR P EE cr doanh 212 GALibration AIQ bIATiming S VAM rnnt an ro eek oe ae EpL etr URS de ke YEN eee sek etr et peur Fees rk veo 145 GONFigure CDPowet CTABle GATalog tr ern n ne e rer erp e E n ras 169 GONFigure CDPower CTABIe COMMABntL cioo onn rrr terr there ree EVI n o e a ED SERE 171 CONFigure CDPower CTABle COPY m GONFigure CDPowet CTABle DA A contr tpe rrr nn etn ee n t negent GONFigure CDPower CTABle DEL te 2 n mnn rene trt rh rre e rre E ee apa Lu ERE Eon GONFigure CDPower C TABle MSIIL iens conecto epo iuo rero egy a Ha ete patres ERP X CHE OVE DTE MOVE ECOLE GONFigure CDPowet CTABle NAME rnnt reete egere Fe a dte re TR ERR GONFigure CDPower CTABle ORDJer trt reor tr t Ferr ber Ee nre re pa ka E ED
11. tne tnnt rro hk then th rrr ees 180 SENSe POWer ACHanneE SEOT STARE reor teer ett nen ctt etos te rok End ene rh kn e n 181 ISENS POWerACHannel SEOT STOB 2 ctp tend Le urere X a E Rose DON EO sta TEQUE V FRANE eects 181 SENSe PROBesp ID PARTnutmb6er ir rre eer er re rh ener re rri c ERR EE 146 SENS amp PROBesp ID SRNu urmibet itinere rero ea HERR EE Eau a a Pee euh 146 SENSe PROBesp SETup OMOFTS6L aoi tr steak ditat FREE Ca ee ERE udo Uk EYE CEU 146 SENSe PROBesp SETUp MODBE nat peret rr en c rh ERE Een he eR EFC aL aed 147 SENSe PROBe p SETUp NAMEYT itr tret titre Irae ea CR ERE ERR e rid EE 147 SENSe PROBesp SETUD S TATE tot tto iit a oc cadet Cu RAT BEN CHAR RU RR EET A MANT 148 SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup TYPE SENSe SWEep COUNE i M piis MM CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt AOFF CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum LEFT T asasinen enne rennen nennen 219 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum NEXT esses enne rennen nennen rennen enns 219 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum RIGHLEt sess eene en trennen CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK CALCulatesn gt DEL Tamarker lt m gt MINIMUMLEF T isi cou c et anime tente era iro tea rhet e ira CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum NEXT cceeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeceneeeeceeeeeesea
12. To define a channel one row in the channel table you have to enter eight values in the following order lt ChannelType gt lt CodeClass gt lt CodeNumber gt lt ModType gt lt MAShift gt lt Active Flag gt lt Reserved gt lt Reserved gt Return values lt ChannelType gt 0 7 Type of the channel 0 inactive 1 midamble 2 DPCH 3 P CCPCH 4 S CCPCH 5 FPACH 6 PDSCH 7 PICH Note that values 2 to 7 are not distinguished by the application all these values are mapped to the value 2 DPCH lt CodeClass gt 0 4 Code class of the channel The code class specifies the spread ing factor of the channel 0 spreading factor 1 1 spreading factor 2 2 spreading factor 4 3 spreading factor 8 4 spreading factor 16 lt CodeNo gt 1 16 Code number of the channel The number of codes depends on the spreading factor see table 4 2 lt ModType gt Modulation type of the channel 0 invalid for midamble 1 QPSK 2 8PSK 3 16QAM 4 64QAM lt MAShift gt 0 38400 Midamble shift of the channel lt ActiveFlag gt 0 1 Flag to indicate whether a channel is active 1 or not 0 10 5 7 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Reserved Placeholder values Currently not used lt Reserved2 gt Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME CTAB 1 Selects or creates channel table CTAB 1 CONF CDP CTAB DATA 124 4 151 1 1 0 0 2 4 2 L 1 140 0 Defines two data channels with QPSK modu
13. Parameters State ON 1 If an unfiltered signal is received normal case the RRC filter should be used to get a correct signal demodulation OFF 0 If a filtered signal is received the RRC filter should not be used to get a correct signal demodulation This is the case if the DUT filters the signal RST 1 Example SENS CDP FILT STAT OFF Manual operation See RRC Filter State on page 84 Configuring Code Domain Analysis SENSe CDPower IQLength lt CaptureLength gt This command specifies the number of slots that are captured by one measurement If more than one set is to be captured see SENSe CDPower SET COUNt on page 164 the number of slots is automatically set to the maximum of 64 Parameters lt CaptureLength gt Range 2 to 64 RST 7 Example SENS CDP IQLength 3 Manual operation See Number of Slots to Capture on page 84 SENSe CDPower QINVert lt State gt This command inverts the Q branch of the signal Parameters ON OFF RST OFF Example CDP QINV ON Activates inversion of Q branch Manual operation See Invert Q on page 84 SENSe CDPower SET COUNt lt NoOfSets gt This command sets the number of sets to be captured and stored in the instrument s memory Refer to Set Count on page 84 for more information Parameters lt NoOfSets gt Range 1 to TDS 99 CDMA 490 Increment 1 RST 1 Example CDP SET COUN 12 Sets the number of sets to 12 Mode TD
14. aa Performing the measurement Stops continuous sweep INIT CONT OFF Start a new measurement with 10 sweeps and wait for the end INIT WAI PfeeesERBeeeRERE Retrieving results Query the result of the limit check for the 50 subframes against the transmission power mask CALC LIM FAIL Retrieve the calculated peak power value of the 50 subframes CALC MARK FUNC POW RES PPOW Result 1 02 dB Retrieve the trace data of the power vs time measurement TRAC DATA TRACE1 Result 1 201362252 1 173495054 1 187217355 1 186594367 1 171583891 1 188250422 1 204138160 1 181404829 1 186317205 1 197872400 Table 10 12 Trace results for power vs time measurement Subframe Power level 1 201362252 1 173495054 1 187217355 1 186594367 1 171583891 1 188250422 11 11 1 Q Parameter XML File Specification I Q Data File Format iq tar I Q data is packed in a file with the extension iq tar An iq tar file contains I Q data in binary format together with meta information that describes the nature and the source of data e g the sample rate The objective of the iq tar file format is to separate l Q data from the meta information while still having both inside one file In addition the file format allows you to preview the I Q data in a web browser and allows you to include user specific data The iq tar container pack
15. The values are normalized to the square root of the average power at the selected slot 10 9 3 5 Composite EVM RMS For the Composite EVM result display the command returns two values for each slot in the following order Slot 0 lt MAccuracy_0 gt Slot n lt MAccuracy_n gt The number of slots depends on the capture length Retrieving Results 10 9 3 6 Mag Error vs Chip When the trace data for this evaluation is queried a list of magnitude error values of all chips at the selected slot is returned 722560 values The values are calculated as the magnitude difference between the received signal and the reference signal for each chip in 96 and are normalized to the square root of the average power at the selected slot 10 9 3 7 Peak Code Domain Error For the Peak Code Domain Error result display the command returns two values for each slot in the following order lt Slot_0 gt lt AbsLevel_0 gt Slot n AbsLevel n The number of slots depends on the capture length 10 9 3 8 Phase Error vs Chip When the trace data for this evaluation is queried a list of phase error values of all chips in the selected slot is returned 22560 values The values are calculated as the phase difference between the received signal and the reference signal for each chip in degrees and are normalized to the square root of the average power at the selected slot 10 9 3 9 Power vs Slot For the Power vs Slot result d
16. For details on digital I Q output see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer User Manual Remote command OUTPut DIO on page 142 Output Settings Information Displays information on the settings for output via the optional Digital Baseband Inter face The following information is displayed Maximum sample rate that can be used to transfer data via the Digital Baseband Interface i e the maximum input sample rate that can be processed by the con nected instrument Sample rate currently used to transfer data via the Digital Baseband Interface e Level and unit that corresponds to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 m EE eS SSS ee User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 66 6 2 2 4 QD Code Domain Analysis Full Scale Level Remote command OUTPut DIQ CDEVice on page 142 Connected Instrument Displays information on the instrument connected to the optional Digital Baseband Interface if available If an instrument is connected the following information is displayed Name and serial number of the instrument connected to the Digital Baseband Inter face Used port Remote command OUTPut DIQ CDEVice on page 142 Analog Baseband Input Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the optional Ana log Baseband Interface in the applications that support it They can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box Radio Frequency Input Settings Digital I
17. Suffix port Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters Length Pulse length in seconds Manual operation See Pulse Length on page 65 Signal Capturing The following commands are required to configure how much and how data is captured from the input signal MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master channel actually captures data from the input signal The data acquisition settings for the TD SCDMA application in MSRA mode define the application data see also chapter 10 12 Configuring the Applica tion Data Range MSRA mode only on page 222 For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual Useful commands when defining signal capturing described elsewhere SENSe CDPower SET on page 177 Remote commands exclusive to defining signal capturing SENSe CDPower FILTer S TATe esses nnne nennen nnne nnns 163 SENSeTCDPOowWerlOLengll cente ette ele t htt cad betae etna 164 SENSe CDPowet OINVert 1 22 22 neret eia et riesen nena te sat e cri eren Reds 164 SENSe JODPawerSETIOO INL uus cer dacause a eren ose ex ye Ee rune ra erue ooi SES 164 SENSe CDPower FILTer STATe State This command selects if a root raised cosine RRC receiver filter is used or not This feature is useful if the RRC filter is implemented in the device under test DUT
18. n 1 16 Window lt t gt 1 CDA Trace 6 Frequency and time domain lt m gt 1 4 CDA Marker 1 16 Frequency and time domain 10 3 Activating the TD SCDMA Applications TD SCDMA measurements require a special application on the R amp S FSW The mea surement is started immediately with the default settings Activating the TD SCDMA Applications INSTrament o REate DUPLiICale 1 iaceret peter t petat ia Eaa riaan NE 130 INS Trument o EateD NEW draco RR Roe VER cent MR UI oEE SURE RE ERCde ERE RE IR e NSAER ERE RANKEROE 130 INS Tramemntto REAIS REPAS eire eec iretur seduta aee o disgusts een aei p pev dele eR Mu DDR ie 130 INS Tr mesenb DELI ueteri e etae tete mar rarae rere rade de qve ned anneau 131 INS Tr mmebib d S TQ o ocio a Pas aleddeiaea oases eee Bro cm cT M PT PIC d sa EAE 131 INSTr menbRENSNI 2 o rane aaa iaaa aa AE A EREA Eaa D duane cconace 132 INS Tr ment SEE est uniti eR pen cenae ett beni re Irene tet petet pe d 133 SYSTem PRESetCHANnsIEEXEGCUte 21r rroici teo eesti orca aac oca ua to eoe a aL eun a La e dot 133 INSTrument CREate DUPLicate This command duplicates the currently selected measurement channel i e creates a new measurement channel of the same type and with the identical measurement set tings The name of the new channel is the same as the copied channel extended by a consecutive number e g IQAnalyzer gt IQAnalyzer2 The channel to be duplic
19. 1 02 dB Retrieve the trace data of the power measurement TRAC DATA TRACE1 Result 1 482287750E 002 6 440737915E 001 1 482287750E 002 1 482287750E 002 1 482287750E 002 6 440737915E 001 1 482287750E 002 1 482287750E 002 Table 10 7 Trace results for power measurement Frequency Power level 1 482287750E 002 6 440737915E 001 1 482287750E 002 1 482287750E 002 1 482287750E 002 6 440737915E 001 Measurement 2 Determining the Spectrum Emission Mask 9 Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Activate a TD SCDMA BTS measurement channel named BTSMeasurement INST CRE NEW BTDS BTSMeasurement Set the reference level to 0 dBm DISP TRAC Y SCAL RLEV 0 Set the center frequency to 2 1175 GHz FREQ CENT 2 1175 GHz Select the spectrum emission mask measurement CONF CDP MEAS ESP ae Configuring the measurement Set the slot range to analyze downlink data from slots 3 to 7 switching point 2 SENS POW ACH SLOT STAR 3 SENS POW ACH SLOT STOP 7 Automatically set the reference level and trigger to frame values according to measured levels and time SENS POW ACH AUTO LTIM Stops continuous sweep INIT CONT OFF Programming Examples TD SCDMA BTS Sets the number of sweeps to be performed to 10 SWE COUN 10 Start a new measurement with 10 sweeps and wait for the end INIT WAI Retrieving results Retri
20. 215 3 0517578125e 5 V Example PreviewData in XML lt PreviewData gt lt ArrayOfChannel length 1 gt lt Channel gt lt PowerVsTime gt lt Min gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 134 lt float gt lt float gt 142 lt float gt lt float gt 140 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Min gt lt Max gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 70 lt float gt lt float gt 71 lt float gt lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Max gt lt PowerVsTime gt lt Spectrum gt lt Min gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 133 lt float gt lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Min gt lt Max gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 67 lt float gt float 69 float float 70 float float 69 float ArrayOfFloat Scaling Factor Numerical value Numerical value x ScalingFac tor Minimum negative int16 value 215 32768 1V Maximum positive int16 value 215 1 32767 0 999969482421875 V 11 2 Q Data Binary File lt Max gt lt Spectrum gt IQ lt Histogram width 64 height 64 gt 0123456789 0 lt Histogram gt IQ lt Channel gt lt ArrayOfChannel gt lt PreviewData gt I Q Data Binary File The I Q data is saved in binary format according to the format and data type specified in the XML file See Format ele
21. CONF CDP BTS MEAS OBAN See CONFigure CDPower MEASurement on page 133 Querying results CALC MARK FUNC POW RES OBW see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult on page 210 CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult on page 210 CCDF The CCDF measurement determines the distribution of the signal amplitudes comple mentary cumulative distribution function The CCDF and the Crest factor are dis played For the purposes of this measurement a signal section of user definable length is recorded continuously in the zero span and the distribution of the signal amplitudes is evaluated For details see chapter 6 3 6 CCDF on page 106 SSS ae User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 36 R amp S FSW K76 K77 Measurements and Result Display T EF 3 2 2 CF 13 25 GHz Mean Pwr 20 00 dB 2 Result Summary Samples 500000 Mean Peak Crest 10 1 0 1 0 0195 LE 13 22 dBm 5 01 dBm 18 23 dB 6 18 dB Fig 3 22 CCDF measurement results for TD SCDMA BTS measurements Remote command CONF CDP BTS MEAS CCDF see CONFigure CDPower MEASurement on page 133 Querying results CALCulate n STATistics RESult t on page 212 Evaluation Methods for Frequency and Time Measurements The evaluation methods for frequency and time domain measurements are identical to those in the Spectrum application RI Ie X
22. Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Usage Query only General Marker Settings ESI go c eL 217 DISPlay MTABle lt DisplayMode gt This command turns the marker table on and off Parameters lt DisplayMode gt ON Turns the marker table on OFF Turns the marker table off AUTO Turns the marker table on if 3 or more markers are active RST AUTO Example DISP MTAB ON Activates the marker table Manual operation See Marker Table Display on page 115 Positioning the Marker This chapter contains remote commands necessary to position the marker on a trace Positioning Normal MarKOtEs cono e RR e det RES te RR R 3x F saaadeaaawaeeaaaneds 217 e Positioning Delta Markers sssssssssssssssssseeeeneenenee remet nnne 219 Positioning Normal Markers The following commands position markers on the trace CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXiMUM LEFT ccccssscccsccceceseeeesseeececceceeseeceeeeeseeseeeaes 218 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimMUM NEXT cccceccccceesccecececeesececeaceeesseeeeeaeeeeeeeeeees 218 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeaeaeaeaaaeneneteneneees 218 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimUM RIGHL ccccccccseececessseeceecececesceseseseeseeeeeesageeeaes 218 Analysis
23. This command moves a delta marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker and positions a reference marker to the peak power Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute x value of delta marker 1 Manual operation See X value on page 114 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 193 The unit depends on the application of the command 10 10 2 2 10 10 2 3 Analysis Return values Position Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker or the fixed reference Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI
24. Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port OTYPe on page 162 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 161 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger cport PULSe LENGth on page 162 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe IMMediate on page 162 Digital I Q Output Settings The optional Digital Baseband Interface allows you to output I Q data from any R am
25. lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable SYNC PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt These commands control the Positive TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel 10 14 Commands for Compatibility The following commands are provided for compatibility to other signal analyzers only For new remote control programs use the specified alternative commands Commands for Compatibility ie Ba ulate sii FEED cm 227 CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime LIST STATE ccccececeeceeeeeeeecaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 228 SENSe CDPower LEVel ADJust cessisset ener nennt
26. zs RESUS eases dense e e Dr a eh te unida 30 Results remote neces tg 209 Selecting Types RF signal power z pilo Rotation Phase between channels sees 87 RRC gli EN 84 163 RUN CONT pM 93 RUN SINGLE Wy 94 S Sa PIS PAS 5 52 n ens Gremien Ere nt do aH ene Digital 1 Q Digital VQ remote sssi iussu iiuna 141 Scaling Amplitude range automatically 76 Configuration softkey Y aX S i onnaa Scrambling code Programming example 2 Screen MAYOUL cc n ner ene treten dpa Select meas ifenci T 50 SEM Configuration TD SCDMA seee 104 Programming example 230 TD SCDMA resulls nete 34 Sequencer 10 50 Aborting remote 2 eene 194 Activating remote sirsiran ieina 194 Mode remote piano PP Sets Nuimber to capture retten 84 Selected iore ese d edd 84 109 Settings OVGIVIOW fetish doe de HU dob etou te 53 Show inactive chanriels rte 18 Signal capturing Remote control 1 nre etre 163 fen cia EY 83 Signal source ROMO T DCN 138 Single sweep iencim M 94 Single ZOOM cinia tom ofcivoddesesacucdsysuedeaniainevsenete s 97 Slope MI raai ien Slots Active inactive Basics us Downlink uplin
27. Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer2 Usage Query only R amp S9FSW K76 K77 Remote Commands for TD SCDMA Measurements pa M M uan P P Table 10 1 Available measurement channel types and default channel names in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode Application lt ChannelType gt Default Channel Name Parameter Spectrum SANALYZER Spectrum I Q Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer Pulse R amp S FSW K6 PULSE Pulse Analog Demodulation R amp S FSW K7 ADEM Analog Demod GSM R amp S FSW K10 GSM GSM Multi Carrier Group Delay R amp S FSW K17 MCGD MC Group Delay Amplifier Measurements R amp S FSW K18 AMPLifier Amplifier Noise R amp S FSW K30 NOISE Noise Phase Noise R amp S FSW K40 PNOISE Phase Noise Transient Analysis R amp S FSW K60 TA Transient Analysis VSA R amp S FSW K70 DDEM VSA 3GPP FDD BTS R amp S FSW K72 BWCD 3G FDD BTS 3GPP FDD UE R amp S FSW K73 MWCD 3G FDD UE TD SCDMA BTS R amp S FSW K76 BTDS TD SCDMA BTS TD SCDMA UE R amp S FSW K77 MTDS TD SCDMA UE cdma2000 BTS R amp S FSW K82 BC2K CDMA2000 BTS cdma2000 MS R amp S FSW K83 MC2K CDMA2000 MS 1xEV DO BTS R amp S FSW K84 BDO 1xEV DO BTS 1xEV DO MS R amp S FSW K85 MDO 1xEV DO MS WLAN R amp S FSW K91 WLAN WLAN LTE R amp S FSW K10x LTE LTE Real Time
28. CAL GulatesmsMARKersm MIBNIUNEBEF T i iucacsu2asasasvel a vuota dea cuui har ata 218 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum NEXT eese nnnnnne nnn nnns 218 CALCulate n MARKer m MlNimum PEAK eese nnne 219 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum RIGHREt e eeeeeeeeee ener nnn 219 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 117 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 117 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next min
29. COUNt on page 173 Automatic Settings Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FSW automatically according to the current measurement settings In order to do so a measurement is performed The duration of this measurement can be defined automatically or manually To activate the automatic adjustment of a setting select the corresponding function in the AUTO SET menu or in the configuration dialog box for the setting where available MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the following automatic settings are not available as they require a new data acquisition However TD SCDMA applications cannot perform data acquisition in MSRA operating mode Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All 95 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level esses 95 p NiteEsir mugp 96 PMO SCANS AA mm 96 Restore Scale Window eessssissssssssssss essen etnies nnn nn 96 Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto 96 Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual 96 Upper Level Hysteresis esssssssssssssssssssseeeenen eren nnn nn nn nenmenten sensns nn nnn 96 Lower Loval Flysielesls ceni reed ttr ee re ce xdi dede n 96 Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto A
30. Differential l Q and inverse 1 Q data Not available for R amp S FSW85 Remote command INPut IQ BALanced STATe on page 143 High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RF Activates a mode with enhanced timing accuracy between analog baseband RF and external trigger signals Note Prerequisites for previous models of R amp S FSW For R amp S FSW models with a serial number lower than 103000 special prerequisites and restrictions apply for high accuracy timing To obtain this high timing precision trigger port 1 and port 2 must be connected via the Cable for High Accuracy Timing order number 1325 3777 00 Code Domain Analysis e As trigger port 1 and port 2 are connected via the cable only trigger port 3 can be used to trigger a measurement Trigger port 2 is configured as output if the high accuracy timing option is active Make sure not to activate this option if you use trigger port 2 in your measurement setup When you first enable this setting you are prompted to connect the cable for high accuracy timing to trigger ports 1 and 2 If you cancel this prompt the setting remains disabled As soon as you confirm this prompt the cable must be in place the firmware does not check the connection In remote operation the setting is activated without a prompt For more information see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and l Q Input User Manual Remote command CALibration AIQ HATiming STATe on page 145 Center Fre
31. For the TD SCDMA BTS application the application data range is defined by the same commands used to define the signal capture in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode see chapter 10 5 4 Signal Capturing on page 163 Be sure to select the correct measurement channel before executing this command In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the application data for the TD SCDMA BTS measurement The analysis interval used by the individual result displays cannot be edited but is determined automatically However you can query the currently used analysis interval for a specific window The analysis line is displayed by default but can be hidden or re positioned Remote commands exclusive to MSRA applications The following commands are only available for MSRA application channels CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALIN SHOW cccccceseseceencecceesecesssseceaecceseaucceseeeeeeegeceseeeeseanees 223 CAL Culate lt n MSRAALING VALU icai re eua eruat n nites tnnt 223 CALC late lt sn gt MSRA WINDOW A gt IVAL Z 22 2 2 2ic etre n DE pereo gv E Y RR rb ec Io NER T Iu Deed 223 INITiate lt n gt REFRESH irrena ene te RR RUD Rex SR Rr e aen Ren ERE RR Rae R ROSA a Te Re DRGaRR i 223 SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet sse nenne neret innt nen en e rene n nsns en 224 Configuring the Application Data Range MSRA mode only CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe SHOW This command
32. Inpu tsettifigs 5 ore hover Os Eigen ias Analysis Code Domain Settings re re ees 109 FREMOLE COMMON oorr SEE EE 213 RF measurements 108 f upemet cm 108 Analysis interval MSRA iere ERR SUIS REN iene Analysis line Attenuation aaan sasn e D eR REDE a HER URN TRIER EPUM EE f Ure Configuration remote 154 Displayed CT 11 Electroni Cesana aN eS a EEEE ESS 72 Manual oenina a E TE 72 iejou c D 72 Protective remote sss 135 Autoalan a iE SaN E i 95 Auto level HYSIETESI Siiger db CER EF ee TR ER De 96 Reference level sssssssssssssnees 71 74 95 SOflKey i ae Auto scaling Auto settings Meastime Auto Meastime Manual FREMOLE COMO 255 too tente spin dotes faVizir Te qoe aen Avg Power Inact Chan 7 PAV Gs RODE cucsrradincpdene deett eo e RHEINE B Bandwidth Coverage MSRA mode sess 46 MON pee 51 Base station SOG BUS e 9 Base transceiver station CINA Pc 9 Bits Depending on Modulation Depending on spreading factor pet sloE ose per symbol Bitstream Evaluation oec ro aa Record 16 Trace results croco cae Fer cosi ee 205 BUS 9 C Capture Length veces cviasev suaveiieneninanaravs 84 Capture offset MSRA applications 81 84 Is i re 224 Softkey nee 3o B1 Carrier
33. RUN SINGLE L Lines NP ict 51 List Evaluation Result display oett coo eet o as e o er ee cian 38 LO feedthrough is Lower Level Flysteresis eere rent ern trn 96 M Mag Error vs Chip Iun 22 Trace results tibi ter anaien 207 Mapping Channel recte etd ensi tene tnc 15 Marker Functions DIT 51 Marker table COMIQUIING EET RETE 114 Evaluation method sssssseseees 23 39 Markers Configuration remote ssess 214 217 COmMMQUIING e e aa aaao NEEE 113 Configuring SOflKey erinnern 112 Deactivating Delta matKers scrocitoe eo a entre e a eb a MITAN cz recu Fr eter mi Lobo C or ehe dcbet tres Minimum remote control Next MINIMUM 5 oes eee een Ire en ee cia te ede Next minimum remote control 217 Next peak Next peak remote control ssssssss 217 Peak rm Peak remote control e FOSIMOMING Mee PEE Querying position remote seseees 212 Search settings ui Settings remote ccce rtt 214 State Table T Table evaluation method 23 39 Du enn ainai an aaa duvetastaesaat 114 MAShift see Midamble shift eee 16 Maximizing Windows remote eene dicc te enitn 182 Maximum REI E 76 Measurement channel Creating remote eie eei eame rad Deleting remote sese D
34. Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s center frequency 4 Select the Amplitude tab to define the reference level and other settings concern ing the expected power levels 5 Optionally in the Overview select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an external trigger to start capturing data only when a useful signal is transmitted 6 Select the Signal Capture button and define the acquisition parameters for the input signal i e how many sets and slots are to be captured In MSRA mode define the application data instead see To select the application data for MSRA measurements on page 122 7 Select the Synchronization button and define the channel synchronization set tings i e the maximum number of users and the scrambling code to be expected in the input signal 8 Select the Channel Detection button and define how the individual channels are to be detected within the input signal If necessary define a channel table as described in To define or edit a channel table on page 120 9 Select the Display Config button and select the evaluation methods that are of interest to you Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 10 Exit the SmartGrid mode and select the Overview softkey to display the Over view again R amp S FSW K76 K77 How to Perform Measurements in TD SCDMA Applications 11 Select the Ana
35. Usage Event Starting a Measurement Manual operation See Continue Single Sweep on page 94 INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous State This command controls the measurement mode for an individual measurement chan nel Note that in single measurement mode you can synchronize to the end of the mea surement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous measurement mode synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous measurement mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single measurement end synchronization For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual If the measurement mode is changed for a measurement channel while the Sequencer is active see INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate on page 194 the mode is only considered the next time the measurement in that channel is activated by the Sequencer Suffix n irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 Continuous measurement OFF 0 Single measurement RST 1 Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the measurement mode to single measurement INIT CONT ON Switches the measurement mode to continuous measurement Manual operation See Continuous Sweep RUN CONT on page 93 See Start Meas on page 101 INITiate lt n gt IMMediate This command starts a single new measurement You can synchronize to the end of
36. frontend of the measurement setup e ROG IUCY oes coii ee Ex eri ie S 149 e Amplitude and Scaling Settings 151 Configuring the ABenballOri oce eorr tenet Eee nente ede e pea 154 10 5 2 1 Frequency ISENSe EREOUSDOV GENTE 2 cere etd en e de te A sta esa dae a ean ex xe Re rer muda 149 SENSe FREQuency CENTerISTEP iiec ttd adest A ae repe aT X E RE EE PR RERA 150 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO ieieie ecce ente tnnt in en nin nn LS ERR ERN ke XR ERR aR 150 SENSeTEREOUSDIGUSOPE Sel seco ei eme Pavel crece nae ate d xe era sa ede 150 SENSe FREQuency CENTer Frequency This command defines the center frequency Parameters Frequency The allowed range and fmax is specified in the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command DOWN Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Configuring Code Domain Analysis Manual operation See Center Frequency on page 62 See Center frequency on page 76 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size Parameters lt StepSize gt fmax iS specified in the data sheet Range
37. lt SerialNo gt Usage Configuring Code Domain Analysis 1 213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input I 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Serial number in a string Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup MODE Mode Select the action that is started with the micro button on the probe head See also Microbutton Action on page 63 Suffix lt p gt Parameters lt Mode gt Manual operation 1 2 3 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I RSINgle Run single starts one data acquisition NOACtion Nothing is started on pressing the micro button RST RSINgle See Microbutton Action on page 63 SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup NAME Queries the name of the probe Suffix lt p gt Return values lt Name gt Usage 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Name string Query only 10 5 1 5 Configuring Code Domain Analysis SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup STATe Queries if the probe at the specified connector is active detected or not active not detected To switch the probe on i e activate input from the connecto
38. lt StartSlot gt The start slot may not be larger than the stop slot In the UE application the default value is 1 Range 1to7 RST 4 Example POW ACH SLOT STAR 2 Manual operation See Start Slot Stop Slot on page 101 SENSe POWer ACHannel SLOT STOP lt StopSlot gt Sets the last slot of the measurement Parameters lt StopSlot gt The stop slot may not be lower than the start slot In the UE application stop slots other than 1 require an external trigger The default value is 1 Range 1to7 RST 6 Example POW ACH SLOT STOP 5 Manual operation See Start Slot Stop Slot on page 101 10 7 Configuring the Result Display The following commands are required to configure the screen display in a remote envi ronment The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 6 1 Result Display Configuration on page 50 e General Window Commands sssssssssseseneneenene nennen nentes 181 e Working with Windows in the Display aceite me 182 ZOOMING IMO the BIspley ip eti Reda RE EO pea pe deme area eaeeeee 189 10 7 1 General Window Commands The following commands are required to configure general window layout independent of the application PIA Ie Ur E NEE 181 DISPlay AW NDewspP E SIZE cuero tee rr aee YR eue E Renee pv Rentner ra aire reae Perte EE Rax 182 DISPlay FORMat Format This command determines which tab is displayed Conf
39. n ZOOM MULTiple zoom STATe eessseeeeeneneneenens 191 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area for a multiple zoom To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm ome 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window E E E ume ecc E E User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 190 10 8 Starting a Measurement Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 97 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe State This command turns the mutliple zoom on and off Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window If you turn off one of the zoom windows all subsequent zoom windows move up one position Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 97 See Restore Original Display on page 97 See X Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 97 Starting a Measurement The measureme
40. oun eit ett E eon nut rob cn win pud FREE 90 COPYING seat VAS sce See nee aoc desea dur Feed trastero ere a LE a ERD AE RR de Eae dates 90 B were E 90 Predefined Tables The list shows all available channel tables and marks the currently used table with a checkmark The currently focused table is highlighted blue Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure CDPower CTABle CATalog on page 169 Selecting a Table Selects the channel table currently focused in the Predefined Tables list and com pares it to the measured signal to detect channels Remote command CONFigure CDPower CTABle SELect on page 170 Creating a New Table Creates a new channel table See chapter 6 2 8 4 Channel Details on page 92 For step by step instructions on creating a new channel table see To define or edit a channel table on page 120 6 2 8 3 Code Domain Analysis Editing a Table You can edit existing channel table definitions The details of the selected channel are displayed in the Channel Table dialog box See chapter 6 2 8 4 Channel Details on page 92 Copying a Table Copies an existing channel table definition The details of the selected channel are dis played in the Channel Table dialog box See chapter 6 2 8 4 Channel Details on page 92 Remote command CONFigure CDPower CTABle COPY on page 170 Deleting a Table Deletes the currently selected channel table after a message is
41. 1 to fMAX RST 0 1 x span Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 77 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO lt State gt This command couples or decouples the center frequency step size to the span In time domain zero span measurements the center frequency is coupled to the RBW Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example FREQ CENT STEP AUTO ON Activates the coupling of the step size to the span SENSe FREQuency OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines a frequency offset If this value is not O Hz the application assumes that the input signal was frequency shifted outside the application All results of type frequency will be corrected for this shift numerically by the application Note In MSRA mode the setting command is only available for the MSRA Master For MSRA applications only the query command is available Parameters lt Offset gt Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Frequency Offset on page 77 Configuring Code Domain Analysis 10 5 2 2 Amplitude and Scaling Settings The following commands are required to configure the amplitude and scaling settings in a remote environment Useful commands for amplitude settings described elsewh
42. 2 10 1 6 3 Introduction e UP DOWN Increases or decreases the numeric value by one step The step size depends on the setting In some cases you can customize the step size with a corresponding command Querying numeric values When you query numeric values the system returns a number In case of physical quantities it applies the basic unit e g Hz in case of frequencies The number of dig its after the decimal point depends on the type of numeric value Example Setting SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ Query SENSe FREQuency CENTer would return 1E9 In some cases numeric values may be returned as text e INF NINF Infinity or negative infinity Represents the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 e NAN Not a number Represents the numeric value 9 91E37 NAN is returned in case of errors Boolean Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represen ted by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 Querying boolean parameters When you query boolean parameters the system returns either the value 1 ON or the value 0 OFF Example Setting DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe ON Query DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe would return 1 Character Data Character data follows the syntactic rules of keywords You can enter text using a short or a long form For more information see chapter 10 1 2 Long and S
43. CDPower QINVert on page 164 RRC Filter State Selects if a root raised cosine RRC receiver filter is used or not This feature is useful if the RRC filter is implemented in the device under test DUT ON If an unfiltered signal is received normal case the RRC filter should be used to get a correct signal demodulation Default settings OFF If a filtered signal is received the RRC filter should not be used to get a correct signal demodulation This is the case if the DUT filters the signal Remote command SENSe CDPower FILTer STATe on page 163 Set Count Defines the number of consecutive sets to be captured and stored in the instrument s l Q memory One set consists of 63 slots The R amp S FSW can capture from 1 to 4500 sets Remote command SENSe CDPower SET COUNt on page 164 Set to Analyze Selects a specific set for further analysis The value range depends on the Set Count and is between 0 and Set Count 1 Remote command SENSe CDPower SET on page 177 Number of Slots to Capture Defines the number of slots to capture Note if the Set Count is larger than 1 the number of slots to capture is automatically set to the maximum of 64 Remote command SENSe CDPower IQLength on page 164 Application Data MSRA For the TD SCDMA BTS application in MSRA operating mode the application data range is defined by the same settings used to define the signal capturing in Signal and Spectrum Ana
44. CONT While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CONT key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Continuous Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a channel defined sequence In this case a channel in continuous sweep mode is swept repeatedly Code Domain Analysis Furthermore the RUN CONT key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 193 Single Sweep RUN SINGLE While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the high lighted softkey or key again Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Single Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a chan nel defined sequence In this case a channel in single sweep mode is swept only once by the Sequencer Furthermore the RUN SINGLE key controls the Sequencer not individual
45. E enacts 101 Adapting the Measurement to the Current Signal ssssssssssseee 101 L Start Slot Stop Slot REC T 101 D Lap E 101 Switching Point BTS application only Frequency and Time Domain Measurements The switching point defines the border between uplink slots and downlink slots and is between 1 and 6 In downlink Power vs Time measurements the slots of interest are defined as the range from slot 1 to the slot indicated by the Switching Point In the TD SCDMA UE application the slot of interest is slot 1 which cannot be changed Thus the switching point is irrelevant Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime SPOint on page 180 Start Meas Starts measuring the power for the defined number of subframes same effect as pressing the RUN SINGLE key Remote command INIT CONT OFF see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 193 INITiate n IMMediate on page 193 No of Subframes Defines the number of subframes that the R amp S FSW includes in the measurement The results of the Power vs Time measurement are based on the average of the num ber of the subframes This setting is identical to the Sweep Average Count on page 94 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime SFRames on page 180 Adapting the Measurement to the Current Signal You can adapt the measurement range to the current TD SCDMA signal Start Slot Stop Slot Adapting the Measurement to the Current Signal
46. GHz 93 80 dBm 75 43 dB 57 80 dB 13 25371 GHz 47 08 dBm 28 71 dB 26 08 dB Fig 3 20 SEM measurement results for TD SCDMA BTS measurement Remote command CONF CDP BTS MEAS ESP see CONFigure CDPower MEASurement on page 133 Querying results CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CPOW see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult on page 210 CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult on page 210 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL on page 210 Occupied Bandwidth The Occupied Bandwidth measurement determines the bandwidth that the signal occu pies The occupied bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth in which in default settings 99 of the total signal power is to be found The percentage of the signal power to be included in the bandwidth measurement can be changed The occupied bandwidth Occ BW and the frequency markers are displayed in the marker table User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 35 R amp S FSW K76 K77 Measurements and Result Display eee E 1 Occupied Bandwidth 3 25 GHz 1001 pts 480 0 kHz Span 4 8 MHz 2 Marker Table Type Rer TPE Stimulus Response Function Function Result M 13 25 GHz 25 01 dBm 13 24933826 Gt 1 E 1 333066933 MHz E Fig 3 21 Occupied bandwidth measurement in TD SCDMA BTS application For details see chapter 6 3 5 Occupied Bandwidth on page 105 Remote command
47. However this behavior can be deactivated If Direct Path is set to Off the spectrum analyzer always uses the ana log mixer path Auto Default The direct path is used automatically for frequencies close to zero Off The analog mixer path is always used Remote command INPut DPATh on page 136 High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the analyzer in order to measure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires an additional hardware option Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Remote command INPut FILTer HPASs STATe on page 136 YIG Preselector Activates or deactivates the YIG preselector if available on the R amp S FSW An internal YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW ensures that image frequen cies are rejected However this is only possible for a restricted bandwidth In order to use the maximum bandwidth for signal analysis you can deactivate the YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW which may lead to image frequency display Note that the YIG preselector is active only on frequencies greater than 8 GHz There fore switching the YIG preselector on or off has no effect if th
48. JO 2 2 00000 8 50000 7 50000 1 00000 2 10900 8 15854 7 98416 3 084 0 0000 0000E 0000E 0000E 0064E 7211E 9006E 16900 0 0 006 006 006 009 001 001 6E 00 00 00 001 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 JO 13987200E 009 Programming Examples TD SCDMA BTS R Start Stop RBW Freq Abs Rel Deltato Limit an freq freq Hz peak peak peak margin check ge Hz Hz power power power dB result N Hz dBm o 3 3 00000 7 50000 3 50000 1 00000 2 11398 4 20270 4 02833 5 270 0 0000 0000E 0000E 0000E 7200E 8435E 0231E 56503 0 0 006 006 006 009 001 001 3 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 15 3 Measurement 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power f f9599 5 Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Activate a TD SCDMA BTS measurement channel named BTSMeasurement INST CRE NEW BTDS BTSMeasurement Set the reference level to 10 dBm DISP TRAC Y SCAL RLEV 10 Set the center frequency to 2 1175 GHz FREQ CENT 2 1175 GHz Optimize the scaling of the y axis for the current measurementDISP TRAC Y SCAL AUTO ONCE Capture 32 slots in 1 set SENS CDP SET COUN 1 SENS CDP IQL 32 Invert Q branch of signal SENS CDP QINV ON Base station uses scrambling code 16 SENS CDP SCOD 16 Maximum number of users on base sta
49. Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display OVLD for analog baseband or digitial baseband input Code Domain Analysis The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the hardware of the R amp S FSW is adapted according to this value it is recom mended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel on page 152 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level The scal ing of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Note however that the internal reference level used to adjust the hardware settings to the expected signal optimally ignores any Reference Level Offset Thus it is impor tant to keep in mind the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle and not to rely on the displayed reference level internal reference lev
50. MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores I Q data and the comment to the specified file Manual operation See Q Export on page 49 MMEMory STORecn IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command writes the captured 1 Q data to a file The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant The file extension is iq tar By default the contents of the file are in 32 bit floating point format Secure User Mode Configuring the Application Data Range MSRA mode only In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters 1 lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores the captured I Q data to the specified file Manual operation See I Q Export on page 49 10 12 Configuring the Application Data Range MSRA mode only In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA applications define an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the application data
51. Markers Markers in Code Domain Analysis measurements In Code Domain Analysis measurements the markers are set to individual symbols codes slots or channels depending on the result display Thus you can use the mark ers to identify individual codes for example Sedtch Next Peak s cea dence theta eoe ie e sep eb e d rete c kel t d YR vm rs RR 117 Search Next MIDIQUITE iiie rece rct eese id ete tei d ed ere Lc re Eod ec ue t E ere a 117 Peak Seateh uncis carece nat e recta Y RS Ere saad ERE X NER R ERN IE CENE Dea E kv PE C E Y Hoe EET IRR 117 Sesto UNNI attache perti rece Ee ec rat oce E aaa daagaathsaaguaawanaaanian To CLE CEP ASE 117 Search Next Peak Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next lower maximum of the assigned trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum NEXT on page 218 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum NEXT on page 219 Search Next Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next higher minimum of the selected trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum NEXT on page 218 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum NEXT on page 220 Peak Search Sets the selected marker delta marker to the maximum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK on page 218 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MA
52. ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation to the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 72 INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines an electronic attenuation manually Automatic mode must be switched off INP EATT AUTO OFF see INPut FATT AUTO on page 155 If the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option It is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active Parameters lt Attenuation gt attenuation in dB Range see data sheet Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB OFF Example INP EATT AUTO OFF INP EATT 10 dB Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 72 INPut EATT AUTO State This command turns automatic selection of the electronic attenuation on and off If on electronic attenuation reduces the mechanical attenuation whenever possible This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option It is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active 10 5 3 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP EATT AUTO OFF Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 72 INPut EATT STATe lt State gt This command
53. PSYMbol see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 183 TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 201 Result Summary The Result Summary evaluation displays a list of measurement results on the screen For details see chapter 3 1 1 Code Domain Parameters on page 14 2 Result Summary General Results Set 0 Slot Results Slot 0 Channel Results 1 16 Fig 3 11 Result Summary display for TD SCDMA BTS measurements Note DwPTS and UpPTS parameters Optionally the parameters determined for the Downlink Pilot Time Slot DwPTS or Uplink Pilot Time Slot UpPTS see also chapter 4 2 Frames Subframes and Slots on page 40 can be displayed in the Result Summary see Show DwPTS Results BTS mode on page 111 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH RSUMmary see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 183 TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 201 CALCulate n MARKer FUNCtion CDPower RESult on page 197 Symbol Constellation The Symbol Constellation evaluation shows all modulated symbols of the selected channel and the selected slot Note The red circle indicates the value 1 User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 27 R amp S FSW K76 K77 Measurements and Result Display 4 Symbol Constellation Fig 3 12 Symbol Constellation display for TD SCDMA BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SCONst see on page 183 on page 201 Symbol EVM The Symbol EVM evaluation shows the error between the measured signal and the ideal reference si
54. TD SOOMAA FWD Channel Bandwidth Offset Power ef 1 68 56 dBm 68 56 dBm Channel Bandwidth Offset Lower Upper A M 0 01 dB 0 01 dB Fig 3 19 ACLR measurement in TD SCDMA BTS application For details see chapter 6 3 3 Channel Power ACLR Measurements on page 102 Remote command CONF CDP BTS MEAS ACLR See CONFigure CDPower MEASurement on page 133 Querying results CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult on page 210 CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESul1t on page 210 Spectrum Emission Mask The Spectrum Emission Mask measurement determines the power of the TD SCDMA signal in defined offsets from the carrier and compares the power values with a spec tral mask specified by TD SCDMA For details see chapter 6 3 4 Spectrum Emission Mask on page 104 a IM MUS E User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 34 R amp S FSW K76 K77 Measurements and Result Display 1 Spectrum Emission Mask 1001 pts 800 0 kHz Span 8 0 MHz TD MA DI Ix Bandwidth 1 280 MHz RBW 30 000 kHz REW Frequency Power Abs Power Rel LE LLIS 1 M 13 24741 GHz 47 08 dBm 28 71 dB 26 08 dB 13 24818 GHz 97 60 dBm 79 23 dB 61 60 dB 13 24861 GHz 74 90 dBm 56 53 dB 43 18 dB 13 24918 GHz 60 79 dBm 42 42 dB 32 79 dB 13 25082 GHz 58 56 dBm 40 19 dB 30 56 dB 13 25140 GHz 74 99 dBm 56 62 dB 43 19 dB 13 25214
55. The Bitstream evaluation displays the demodulated bits of a selected channel for a given slot R amp S FSW K76 K77 Measurements and Result Display 2 Bitstream Table DU re eT eee eye eye eles er PP ee 10 00 00 00 00 01 11 11 11 00 11 01 11 10 11 00 00 01 10 11 7 01 01 00 00 11 10 11 01 01 10 10 Fig 3 1 Bitstream display for TD SCDMA BTS measurements Depending on the spreading factor symbol rate of the channel a slot may contain a minimum of 44 and a maximum of 704 symbols Depending on the modulation type a symbol consists of 2 to 6 bits see table 4 8 TIP Select a specific symbol using the MKR key while the display is focused If you enter a number the marker jumps to the selected symbol which is highlighted by a blue circle Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH BITS see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 183 TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 201 Channel Table The Channel Table evaluation displays the detected channels and the results of the code domain power measurement The measurement evaluates the total signal over the selected slot The Channel Table can contain a maximum of 16 entries which cor responds to the 16 codes that can be assigned for a spreading factor of 16 The sort order of the table is configurable see Channel Table Sort Order on page 110 either by code number starting with midambles then control channels then data channels or by midamble whe
56. UpPTS 75 us usd 125 us Switching point interval 75 us Fig 4 1 TD SCDMA signal structure Synchronization The individual channels in the input signal need to be synchronized to detect timing off sets in the slot spacings To do so either slot 0 BTS mode or slot 1 UE mode or the Downlink Pilot Time Slot DwPTS or Uplink Pilot Time Slot UpPTS can be used In UE mode if the UpPTS is used for synchronization you must define the SYNC UL code to be used This code depends on the used scrambling code as indicated in the following table Table 4 1 Possible SYNC UL codes depending on scrambling code Code Group Scrambling Code Sync UL Code Group 1 0to3 0to7 Group 2 4to7 8to 15 Group 32 124 to 127 248 to 255 R amp S FSW K76 K77 Measurement Basics 4 3 Channels and Codes Within each time slot up to 16 code channels may be transmitted Each channel is spread over one to 16 codes also referred to as channelization codes depending on the code class of the channel The code class specifies the spreading factor of the channel and thus the number of possible channels per slot Table 4 2 Relationship between code class channels and spreading factor Code class Spreading factor No channels per slot 2 4 3 8 4 16 Chips The user data is spread to code channels across the available bandwidth using the spreading factor before transmission The spread
57. a Switching Point 3 Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SLOT STARt on page 181 SENSe POWer ACHannel SLOT STOP on page 181 Auto Level amp Time Adapting the Measurement to the Current Signal Automatically adjusts the reference level and the trigger offset to subframe start to their optimum levels for the current signal This prevents overloading the R amp S FSW When this function is activated current measurements are aborted and resumed after the automatic level detection is finished Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel AUTO LTIMe on page 180 CCDF The CCDF measurement determines the distribution of the signal amplitudes comple mentary cumulative distribution function The CCDF measurement is performed as in the Spectrum application with the follow ing settings Table 6 6 Predefined settings for TD SCDMA CCDF measurements CCDF Active on trace 1 Analysis bandwidth 10 MHz Number of samples 500000 Detector Sample For further details about the CCDF measurements refer to Statistical Measurements in the R amp S FSW User Manual To restore adapted measurement parameters the following parameters are saved on exiting and are restored on re entering this measurement e Reference level and reference level offset e Analysis bandwidth e Number of samples The main measurement menus and the configuration Overview for the RF measure ments are identical to the Spectrum
58. a new mea surement The Power vs Time diagram is displayed averaged over the defined number of subframes The result of the limit check against the transmission power mask is also indicated R amp S FSW K76 K77 How to Perform Measurements in TD SCDMA Applications 8 To display the numerical results select the Display Config softkey and drag the Evaluation List result to the display To perform an RF measurement 1 Press the MODE key and select the TD SCDMA BTS applications for base sta tion tests or TD SCDMA UE for user equipment tests Code Domain Analysis of the input signal is performed by default 2 Select the RF measurement a Press the MEAS key b Inthe Select Measurement dialog box select the required measurement The selected measurement is activated with the default settings for TD SCDMA mode immediately 3 If necessary adapt the settings as described for the individual measurements in the R amp S FSW User Manual 4 Select the Display Config button and select the evaluation methods that are of interest to you Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 5 Exit the SmartGrid mode and select the Overview softkey to display the Over view again 6 Select the Analysis button in the Overview to make use of the advanced analy sis functions in the result displays e Configure a trace to display the average over a series of sweeps if necessary increase the Sweep Count in
59. are very large Distortions also occur if unassigned codes are wrongly given the status of active chan nel To obtain reliable measurement results select an adequate channel threshold Error Messages Error messages are entered in the error event queue of the status reporting system in the remote control mode and can be queried with the command SYSTem ERRor A short explanation of the device specific error messages for the TD SCDMA applica tions is given below Status bar message Description Sync not found This message is displayed if synchronization is not possible Possible causes are that frequency level scrambling code Invert Q values are set incorrectly or the input signal is invalid 9 How to Perform Measurements in TD SCDMA Applications The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to perform measurements with the TD SCDMA applications The following tasks are described To perform Code Domain Analysis To define or edit a channel table To perform a Power vs Time check To perform an RF measurement To select the application data for MSRA measurements To perform Code Domain Analysis 1 Press the MODE key and select the TD SCDMA BTS applications for base sta tion tests or TD SCDMA UE for user equipment tests Code Domain Analysis of the input signal is performed by default 2 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for Code Domain Analysis 3
60. confirmed Remote command CONFigure CDPower CTABle DELete on page 170 Channel Table Settings and Functions Some general settings and functions are available when configuring a predefined channel table Channel tables are configured in the Channel Table dialog box which is displayed when you select the New Copy or Edit buttons for a predefined channel table in the Channel Detection dialog box DC T 90 enit ch ieaiees E T sh iadenh eanntteni ase onandenn sad eben eae deans 90 MAREI SMe m 91 Adding a Gheflel uccide teet td emt tae vcra hr be ee 91 Deleting a Channie laes iiie der iei reiten o Ei ve sd ci E ecd 91 Creating a New Channel Table from the Measured Signal Measure Table 91 Sorting the Table By Midamble dtt tpe re rette teint 91 Sorting the Table by Code icri pecie a n cd d ei sted eer 91 Selec ng the Slot to EValUalg rece et Ente Ehe ee tet e Eee o Ere eR 91 Cancelling Configuratio sesirikanira Een Ce Rn nate 91 cB cts vei E O O ee rma ee aegeisiiee 91 Name Name of the channel table that will be displayed in the Predefined Channel Tables list Remote command CONFigure CDPower CTABle NAME on page 171 Comment Optional description of the channel table Remote command CONFigure CDPower CTABle COMMent on page 171 Code Domain Analysis MA Shifts Cell Defines the maximum number of midamble shifts i e the m
61. damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 136 Impedance For some measurements the reference impedance for the measured levels of the R amp S FSW can be set to 50 Q or 75 OQ 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a 75 O adapter of the RAZ type 25 O in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 This value also affects the unit conversion see Reference Level on page 70 This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface or from the optional Analog Baseband Interface For analog baseband input an impe dance of 50 Q is always used Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 137 Direct Path Enables or disables the use of the direct path for small frequencies In spectrum analyzers passive analog mixers are used for the first conversion of the input signal In such mixers the LO signal is coupled into the IF path due to its limited isolation The coupled LO signal becomes visible at the RF frequency 0 Hz This effect is referred to as LO feedthrough Code Domain Analysis To avoid the LO feedthrough the spectrum analyzer provides an alternative signal path to the A D converter referred to as the direct path By default the direct path is selected automatically for RF frequencies close to zero
62. details on these parameters see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 201 10 9 3 13 Symbol Constellation For the Symbol Constellation result display the command returns one value each for the real and imaginary parts of each symbol Reg Imo lt Re gt lt Im4 gt lt Re gt Im The number of symbols depends on the spreading factor see table 4 8 10 9 3 14 Symbol EVM For the Symbol EVM result display the command returns one value for each symbol lt EVMRMS gt The number of symbols depends on the spreading factor see table 4 8 10 9 3 15 Symbol Magnitude Error When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the magnitude error in of each symbol at the selected slot is transferred The number of the symbols depends on the spreading factor of the selected channel NOFSymbols 10 2 8CodeClass 10 9 3 16 Symbol Phase Error When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the phase error in degrees of each symbol at the selected slot is transferred The number of the symbols depends on the spreading factor of the selected channel NOFSymbols 10 2 9 CodeClass 10 9 4 Exporting Trace Results RF measurement trace results can be exported to a file 10 9 5 Retrieving Results For more commands concerning data and results storage see the R amp S FSW User Manual MMEWMory STORexn7 TRACe esses ener nennn rtr reti t ih nh ihnen einen eren nsns nnns 209 FORMSEDEXPOICDSEBPUSFAIOE ttai
63. dialog boxes The Overview and dialog boxes are updated to indicate the settings for the selected window Data Input and Output Settings The R amp S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals 6 2 2 1 Code Domain Analysis Jnput Source SEDIT aede ad ende t rr a gae cc nodes 55 e WOE SS TUNG EUER 63 e Digital VQ Output Settings ueteri perta terea ce agetur Pe a Eye detainee 65 e Analog Baseband Input Settings uci ecu roe LE ru edt de nre d cus 67 Input Source Settings The input source determines which data the R amp S FSW will analyze Input settings can be configured in the Input dialog box Some settings are also available in the Amplitude tab of the Amplitude dialog box Since the Digital I Q input and the Analog Baseband input use the same digital signal path both cannot be used simultaneously When one is activated established connec tions for the other are disconnected When the second input is deactivated connec tions to the first are re established This may cause a short delay in data transfer after Switching the input source e Radio Frequency InpUt cernere rio e bet Pru va ee tre aea Pete ves E Ee ER daba 55 Digital VQ Input Settings eoru tinere nba tna e eran ante aa Ea 58 e Analog Baseband Input Settings 60 e Probe Sel ngs o iet eoo Het ien tend bise d lude eade eda baies i seenendeas 62 Ra
64. marker peak list determines the frequencies and levels of peaks in the spectrum or time domain How many peaks are displayed can be defined as well as the sort order In addition the detected peaks can be indicated in the diagram The peak list can also be exported to a file for analysis in an external application 2 Marker Peak List No Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PEAK see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 183 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 215 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 212 User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 39 Short Introduction to TD SCDMA 4 Measurement Basics Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in TD SCDMA mea surements is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration set tings 4 1 Short Introduction to TD SCDMA While many communication standards such as WCDMA or cdma2000 distribute the data from different users to different frequencies within a specific band FDD mode TD SCDMA distributes the data in time TDD mode Furthermore the mentioned FDD based standards require two distinct frequency bands for uplink to the base sta tion and downlink from the base station communication TD SCDMA on the other hand can adjust the number of time slots and thus the data rate used for downlink or uplink dynamically according to the current traffic requirements The available time slots can be distributed flexibly either
65. mechanical attenuation is applied This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface In Manual mode you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps down to 0 dB Other entries are rounded to the next integer value The range is specified in the data sheet If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenuation the refer ence level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed NOTICE Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF input as an overload may lead to hardware damage Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 154 INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 155 Using Electronic Attenuation If the optional Electronic Attenuation hardware is installed on the R amp S FSW you can also activate an electronic attenuator In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface Note Electronic attenuation is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 13 6 GHz In Auto mode RF attenuation is provided by the electronic attenuator as much as possible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required Mechanical attenua tion ma
66. more parameters To use a command as a query you have to append a question mark after the last header element even if the command contains a parameter R amp SSFSW K76 K77 Remote Commands for TD SCDMA Measurements A header contains one or more keywords separated by a colon Header and parame ters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank If there is more than one parameter for a command these are separated by a comma from one another Only the most important characteristics that you need to know when working with SCPI commands are described here For a more complete description refer to the User Manual of the R amp S FSW Remote command examples Note that some remote command examples mentioned in this general introduction may not be supported by this particular application 10 1 1 Conventions used in Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions e Command usage If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If a command can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters
67. not supported The l Q data is stored in a format with the file extension ig tar For a detailed description see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and l Q Input User Manual Export only in MSRA mode In MSRA mode I Q data can only be exported to other applications I Q data cannot be imported to the MSRA Master or any MSRA applications e Import Export FUDGUOFS eorr Hane E eene RR nde eae etn ER ern bee deve ERES 48 5 1 Import Export Functions The following import and export functions are available via softkeys in the Save Recall menu which is displayed when you select the Save or Open icon in the tool p bar Some functions for particular data types are also available via softkeys or dialog boxes in the corresponding menus e g trace data or marker peak lists For a description of the other functions in the Save Recall menu see the R amp S FSW User Manual WINTON sei MITT 49 L VQ Impork usc siente tnr tete titt ete tk take hb retenta eese a sine te ak 49 2 100 e EE 49 2 i o MMEMRC 49 Import Export Functions Import Provides functions to import data I Q Import Import Opens a file selection dialog box to select an import file that contains IQ data This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process I Q data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications Note that the I Q data must have a specific format as described i
68. of remote control basics in the R amp S FSW User Manual For a description of the status registers for the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer User Manual RST does not influence the status registers e STATus QUEStionable SYNC Register ssssssssssseseeeeeenes 225 Status Registers 10 13 14 STATus QUEStionable SYNC Register The STATus QUEStionable SYNC register contains application specific information about synchronization errors or errors during pilot symbol detection Table 10 5 Status error bits in STATus QUEStionable SYNC register for TD SCDMA applications Bit Definition 0 Not used 1 Frame Sync failed This bit is set when synchronization is not possible within the application Possible reasons e Invalid frequency e Invalid level e Invalid scrambling code e Invalid max number of MA shift cell Invalid values for INVERT Q Invalid signal at input 2to 14 Not used 15 This bit is always 0 STAT us QUEStionable SYNO EVENI J 12 2 2 n titu reae ect aai 225 STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDItOR circles uan tee eden rn Ra Ode ARR RR RR ARA RR ada a R4 225 STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABle eenneenen nennen nnne nne nnns nnne nn 226 STATus QUESHonable S YNG NTRanSIBOD datei attri iiaa 226 STATUS QUEStIOnable SYNC PT RANSOM diio oic cree a re Sce ore p ar E rne ever dr aeo 226 STATus QUEStionab
69. on page 212 Peak Code Domain Error The Peak Code Domain Error is defined as the maximum value for the Code Domain Error for all codes In line with the TD SCDMA specifications the error is calculated between the mea surement signal and the ideal reference signal for a given slot and for each active code for any of the supported spreading codes For inactive slots containing no active channels no results are available as no refer ence power is available User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 23 R amp S FSW K76 K77 Measurements and Result Display 1 Peak Code Domain Error 1 Clrw Fig 3 7 Peak Code Domain Error display for TD SCDMA BTS measurements The result display shows the peak error values per slot The slots are displayed according to the detected channels using the following colors yellow active channel e red selected channel if a channel is made up of more than one code all codes that belong to the channel are red none no active channels Only the channels detected as being active are used to generate the ideal reference signal If a channel is not detected as being active e g on account of low power the difference between the test signal and the reference signal is too large The result dis play therefore shows a peak code domain error that is too high for all slots Distortions also occur if unassigned codes are wrongly given the status of active chan nel To obtain reliable measurement results
70. page 16 e C10 E E AEE TEE E AE eee ee eee 205 Channel Table ceti e t ce ed b Cl aa dances eared 205 e Code Domain Power Code Domain Error Power cesses 206 e Composite Constellation c cessssessssssseseseeennnnnnn nnne nn nnn nnn nnne nnn nns 206 e Composite EVM RMS cresceret eere petens eh Enaca ca REntnch a anainn ninaa Dada a ERR nna 206 e Mag ERO Vs Ghlpi uis ier eec te te ete d eee t en at db ee eie x 207 Peak Code Domain EIfOr teen ecd deae dne qu ka ana e aaia 207 e Phase Error vs CHIP a science riri pen epe en repe ece e pa a rade aaae anaenda anai 207 e Power VS SIGE uiii cette ere d e o en Vade dos Poe deuda 207 e Powervs Symbol toc snedetes eei a ced ced e RR de 207 e POWER VS TI e cee oio en RR Free necu SN EON IE RR ve E ER ERR e UE RYDER 207 LEN LC ullum A RP 208 Symbol COUstellallgr eec eben eee ten er ERR Ek eee Ie annnm dated een 208 10 9 3 1 10 9 3 2 Retrieving Results Symbol EVIML a ci tice huit dd a Dette dir A a wes 208 e Symbol Magnitude EFO eret eer ERN RER Ne Hx SRARIBRERSKBRRR ER RERRRURERERRRERK ERR RARRAMA 208 e Symbol Phase EMO ec ne decursu ri roe reta Sit pneu eei vea aed rox eg n nates 208 Bitstream When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the bit stream of one slot is transfer red One value is transferred per bit range 0 1 The number of bits depends on the m
71. that in this case the settings are lost and the EX IQ BOX functionality is no longer available until you restart the application using the DiglConf softkey in the R amp S FSW once again Analog Baseband Input Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the optional Ana log Baseband Interface in the applications that support it They can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box Input Source Radio Frequency o Input Settings Digital Co 1 Q Mode Input Config Analog Baseband E Ad 4 High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RF IQ File Signal Path Analog I jQ For more information on the optional Analog Baseband Interface see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual If Analog Baseband input is used measurements in the frequency and time domain are not available Analog Baseband Input State 1 2 2 rp ete sac eu a PER THREE OR 60 VAMO T 61 LFA UE Cn eire Rs 61 High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RF ces 61 COmor FOJUSI E 62 Analog Baseband Input State Enables or disable the use of the Analog Baseband input source for measurements Analog Baseband is only available if the optional Analog Baseband Interface is instal led Remote command INPut SELect on page 138 Code Domain Analysis I Q Mode Defines the format of the input signal For more information on I Q data processing modes see the R
72. the Remote Commands chapter of the R amp S FSW User Manual The TD SCDMA RF measurements must be activated for a TD SCDMA application see chapter 10 3 Activating the TD SCDMA Applications on page 129 The individual measurements are activated using the CONFigure CDPower MEASurement on page 133 command Some frequency and time domain measurements require further configuration o Analysis for Frequency and Time Domain Measurements General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers lines etc for RF mea surements are identical to the analysis functions in the Spectrum application except for some special marker functions and spectrograms which are not available in TD SCDMA applications For details see the General Measurement Analysis and Display chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual e Configuring Power vs Time Measurements ccccccceceeeeeeseeeeeneeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 180 e Configuring the Slot Range for Frequency Sweeps on Downlink Data 180 10 6 1 10 6 2 Configuring Frequency and Time Domain Measurements Configuring Power vs Time Measurements CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime SFRames ssssssssssseseseenenen nennen 180 CONFiguresCDPower BTS PV Time SPON ioci dde caede exeun tene tmn tbt tenete 180 SENSe POWer ACHahnelAUTO ETIMe 2 ii terno nietos eene eec eee zy daas a 180 CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime SFRames numeric value This command defin
73. the Sweep settings e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the evaluated signal e Use special marker functions to calculate noise or a peak list e Configure a limit check to detect excessive deviations 7 Optionally export the trace data of the graphical evaluation results to a file a In the Traces tab of the Analysis dialog box switch to the Trace Export tab b Select Export Trace to ASCII File c Define a file name and storage location and select OK To select the application data for MSRA measurements In multi standard radio analysis you can analyze the data captured by the MSRA Mas ter in the TD SCDMA BTS application Assuming you have detected a suspect area of the captured data in another application you would now like to analyze the same data in the TD SCDMA BTS application 1 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for Code Domain Analysis 2 Select the Signal Capture button User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 122 3 Define the application data range as the Capture Length Slots 4 Define the starting point of the application data as the Capture offset The offset is calculated according to the following formula capture offset starting point for application starting point in capture buf fer 5 The analysis interval is automatically determined according to the selected chan nel slot or set to analyze defined for t
74. the Result Summary the Channel Table or both Table 3 2 Channel specific code domain power results Parameter Description Channel Type Detected type of channel see table 4 4 Ch SF Channel number including the spreading factor in the form lt Channel gt lt SF gt SymRate ksps Symbol rate at which the data in the channel is transmitted in ksps Symbol EVM RMS and peak EVM values per symbol see Symbol EVM on page 28 Mod Modulation type QPSK 8PSK 16QAM or 64QAM Power dBm Channel power absolute Power dB Channel power relative to total power of the data parts of the signal Code Domain Analysis Parameter Description MA shift Midamble shift For channels this is the shift of the associated midamble if a common or default mid amble assignment is detected see chapter 4 4 Data Fields and Midambles on page 45 AMid1 2 The power offset between the midamble and the sum power of its channels in data part 1 or 2 respectively The TD SCDMA specifications require that the midamble and its channels must have the same power These parameters show if a common or default midamble assign ment is detected see chapter 4 4 Data Fields and Midambles on page 45 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis The captured I Q data can be evaluated using various different methods without having to start a new measurement All evaluation methods available for the s
75. the bandwidth measurement can be changed The Occupied Bandwidth measurement is performed as in the Spectrum application with the following predefined settings according to TD SCDMA specifications Table 6 5 Predefined settings for TD SCDMA OBW measurements Setting Default value Power Bandwidth 99 Channel bandwidth 1 28 MHz Sweep Time 676 ms RBW 30 kHz VBW 300 kHz Detector RMS Trigger Gated IF power For further details about the Occupied Bandwidth measurements refer to Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth in the R amp S FSW User Manual To restore adapted measurement parameters the following parameters are saved on exiting and are restored on re entering this measurement Reference level and reference level offset e RBW VBW e Sweep time e Span The main measurement menus and the configuration Overview for the RF measure ments are identical to the Spectrum application However an additional function is pro vided to adapt the OBW measurement to the current TD SCDMA signal Adapting the Measurement to the Current Signal You can adapt the measurement range to the current TD SCDMA signal 6 3 6 Frequency and Time Domain Measurements Start Slot Stop Slot Adapting the Measurement to the Current Signal BTS application only Defines the measurement range for Channel Power measurements as a range of slots in the current TD SCDMA signal e g the downlink slots 4 to 6 for
76. the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Usage Event Starting a Measurement Manual operation See Single Sweep RUN SINGLE on page 94 See Start Meas on page 101 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt This command stops the currently active sequence of measurements The Sequencer itself is not deactivated so you can start a new sequence immediately using INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate on page 194 To deactivate the Sequencer use SYSTem SEQuencer on page 196 Suffix n irrelevant Usage Event INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate This command starts a new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer Its effect is similar to the INITiate lt n gt IMMediate command used for a single measurement Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 196 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Usage Event INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer MODE lt Mode gt This command selects the way the R amp S FSW application performs measurements sequentially Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuenc
77. to subframe start to their optimum levels for the current signal This prevents overloading the R amp S FSW When this function is activated current measurements are aborted and resumed after the automatic level detection is finished Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel AUTO LTIMe on page 180 Frequency and Time Domain Measurements 6 3 4 Spectrum Emission Mask The Spectrum Emission Mask measurement determines the power of the TD SCDMA signal in defined offsets from the carrier and compares the power values with a spec tral mask specified by TD SCDMA For further details about the Spectrum Emission Mask measurements refer to Spec trum Emission Mask Measurement in the R amp S FSW User Manual The TD SCDMA applications perform the SEM measurement as in the Spectrum appli cation with the following settings Table 6 4 Predefined settings for TD SCDMA SEM measurements Span 4 MHz Number of ranges 9 Fast SEM ON Number of power classes 1 Channel bandwidth 1 28 MHz Power reference type Channel power Detector RMS o Changing the RBW and the VBW is restricted due to the definition of the limits by the standard To restore adapted measurement parameters the following parameters are saved on exiting and are restored on re entering this measurement Reference level and reference level offset e Sweep time e Span The main measurement menus and the configuration Overview for the RF
78. type does not activate an additional marker it only switches the type of the selected marker Normal A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in the diagram Delta A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the speci fied reference marker marker 1 by default Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 214 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 215 All Markers Off Deactivates all markers in one step Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 215 7 4 2 General Marker Settings General marker settings are defined in the Marker Config tab of the Marker dialog box R amp S FSW K76 K77 Analysis m x Range Marker Table Code Domain Settings off Trace Analysis Markers Marker Settings Search Marker Marker Table Display Defines how the marker information is displayed On Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area beneath the diagram Off Displays the marker information within the diagram area Auto Default Up to two markers are displayed in the diagram area If more markers are active the marker table is displayed automatically Remote command DISPlay MTABle on page 217 7 4 3 Marker Search Settings Several functions are available to set the marker to a specific position very quickly and easily In order to determine the required marker position se
79. ve pn td dro is atat evt avait ua Fete eec ve oe e d Co ne e ceca eii e petu 209 MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe Trace lt FileName gt This command exports trace data from the specified window to an ASCII file Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt Trace gt Number of the trace to be stored lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR1 TRAC 3 C TEST ASC Stores trace 3 from window 1 in the file TEST ASC Usage SCPI confirmed FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command selects the decimal separator for data exported in ASCII format Parameters lt Separator gt COMMa Uses a comma as decimal separator e g 4 05 POINt Uses a point as decimal separator e g 4 05 RST RST has no effect on the decimal separator Default is POINt Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator Retrieving RF Results The following commands are required to retrieve the results of the TD
80. 0 single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 191 for each multiple zoom window i Deactivating Zoom Selection mode Deactivates any zoom mode Frequency and Time Domain Measurements Tapping the screen no longer invokes a zoom but selects an object Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 190 single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 191 for each multiple zoom window 6 3 Frequency and Time Domain Measurements TD SCDMA measurements require a special application on the R amp S FSW which you activate using the MODE key When you activate a TD SCDMA application Code Domain Analysis of the input signal is started automatically However the TD SCDMA applications also provide various frequency and time domain measurement types Selecting the measurement type gt To select a frequency and time domain measurement type do one of the following e Select the Overview softkey In the Overview select the Select Measure ment button Select the required measurement e Press the MEAS key In the Select Measurement dialog box select the required measurement Some parameters are set automatically according to the TD SCDMA standard the first time a measurement is selected since the last PRESET operation A list of these parameters is given with each measurement type The parameters can be changed but are not reset auto
81. 10 8 10 9 10 10 10 11 10 12 10 13 10 14 10 15 11 11 1 11 2 How to Perform Measurements in TD SCDMA Applications 119 Remote Commands for TD SCDMA Measurements 124 Int MUCHO p P 124 Common SUPPIXCS wisccsscs scccccess csscececesscttececessetecceesseteccessestee cesses sctecssssseteeceessseeecsessseceess 129 Activating the TD SCDMA Applications c c s eeceeeeeee eee eeeeeneeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 129 Selecting a MeaSureMme nl cicicceccccccsccccccecsscececceescceecseesccecessesscceceesescccesesedeceecessesseers 133 Configuring Code Domain Analysis eese nennen 134 Configuring Frequency and Time Domain Measurements 179 Configuring the Result Display seen nennen nnn 181 Starting a Meas rement iiie tenen eituuran cei SEEN saaana aaaea 191 Retrieving Results nennen nete es saasctercesaacteecessasteeeessasvetees 196 Uu e e 213 Importing and Exporting I Q Data and Results eene 221 Configuring the Application Data Range MSRA mode only 222 Status Registers eoieietiiiieen ced sactens seccaceesssesssecessedeasteeess 224 Commands for Compatibility eene nennen 226 Programming Examples TD SCDMA BTS cceseccssseeeeeeeeeseseeeeseeeeseeeneeeneeeeeeas 228 VQ Data File For
82. 129 e Activating the TD SCDMA Applications rrt tr rrt peterent 129 e Selecting a Measurement cecidi aed oi erae 133 e Configuring Code Domain Analysis eese 134 e Configuring Frequency and Time Domain Measurements sss 179 e Configuring the Result Display tede eee roce 181 Starting a MeasuleimaliE rrt ex aa at t pu exa beret pe 191 Retrieving Results 1 educere e thru ie ayers ents ee ataca Le I ENAREN ROLL e vd ug 196 J JAfalySla 2 ete de e daro con te Poll a cedet aati dus c eate E td 213 e Importing and Exporting I Q Data and Results seeeessss 221 e Configuring the Application Data Range MSRA mode only 222 e Status Registers cepe emere inier edet ERE sede ERRR e todo Ep E eade e good ce ER pru 224 e Commands for Compatbility 2 corii titer desee rende terea Ld eS Rada 226 e Programming Examples TD SCDMA BTS senes 228 Introduction Commands are program messages that a controller e g a PC sends to the instru ment or software They operate its functions setting commands or events and request information query commands Some commands can only be used in one way others work in two ways setting and query If not indicated otherwise the com mands can be used for settings and queries The syntax of a SCPI command consists of a header and in most cases one or
83. 2 Editing 90 Managifig EEEE ttr tee miner tenas 89 Managing remote 24 169 Predefined itn edicere tied zc cep at tete 89 Selecting 4 89 Settings 90 Trace Tesults Tinnen nive c ruido e oec 205 Channel types Configuring In table eee 92 Channelization codes S66 COd6S 5 nni eau Cds 42 Channels ACTIVE ieevsttocats cies near a eae eh ates a 88 93 Active threshold 168 BASICS 5e e rd ed eere DER Hd oov cheney tuu 42 GhiaracteristiCs oie rene rcge Cio sid 43 Data rates 44 Detection 42 Displayed etm merecen 11 DPGHI 5er 42 43 Inactive SHOWING 212 2 tU cere s teas 18 MAPPING n 15 MID AMD mr 43 No of Active 14 Notation 44 P CCPOH nente 42 Parameter dependencies 44 Power threshold 2 2 2 42 Selected 44 108 RrII 42 State 2499 Types 43 User data 43 Chip rate 42 Chip fate EMON isishi rrika tees aidean deri ais 14 Chips B aslCS 5 6 nece test hl eec ae 42 Closing Channels remote 2 2 cde ets Windows remote Code classes cerent nent i rena Een EATE Code Domain Analysis 66 CDA dtreise findi fedes uo Petites 13 Code domain error power S66 CDEP scd ON Ese 14 Code Domain Power see CDP er c EE 18 Code domain settings SOMKGY cene HUP e t entiendes 109 Code Power Display Codes Active iliactlVe Joiner rise re ee Er
84. 5 37 0 0 0 0 0 4 l5 Ly 46 9 943 9 3 0 0 0 Q0 0 4 16 1 46 9 43 9 3 0 0 0 0 Retrieving Results 10 9 3 3 Code Domain Power Code Domain Error Power When the trace data for this evaluation is queried 4 values are transmitted for each channel CodeClass CodeNo Level ActiveFlag e the code class lt CodeClass gt e the channel number lt CodeNo gt e the absolute or relative level Level depending on SENSe CDPower PDISplay on page 178 e the state of the channel lt ActiveFlag gt For details on these parameters see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 201 The query returns a maximum of 16 channels Channels that consist of more than one code are returned as one channel Example Consider the following configuration three active channels out of a total of 12 e DPCH 1 16 CC4 7 0 dB e DPCH 2 8 CC3 7 3 dB e DPCH 34 CC2 8 0 dB In this example the command would return the following string active channels in bold 4 l 7 0 1 4 2 55 1 0 3 2 7T 3 1 4 5 56 9 0 4 G5 955 8 0 4 Ty 9597 0 0 2 3 8 0 I 4 13 955 8 0 4 14 56 3 0 4 15 55 9 0 4 16 57 3 0 10 9 3 4 Composite Constellation When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the real and the imaginary branches of the chip constellation at the selected slot are transferred lt Re1 gt lt Im1 gt lt Re2 gt lt Im2 gt Re864 Im864
85. 6 ISENSeTPROBeSps SE TUD MODE 2 terat De eter eee ant ee Rl npe tan ete ea D e Rud 147 SENSe PROBe p SETUup NAME 2 Lorie eeu h ce esum a Dec qun posee YE RE S 147 SENSe PROBe lt p SE Tup S TATR 2 aetate tonat tne he Read Ran e e axe e Ex dE les Ex RAS 148 SENSeJPROBe sp SETup l YPES eere e peziu tee epek tee bp ruin Re Ree Roper ch panne pae 148 SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup CMOFfset lt CMOffset gt Sets the common mode offset The setting is only available if a differential probe is connected to the R amp S FSW If the probe is disconnected the common mode offset of the probe is reset to 0 0 V Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Parameters lt CMOffset gt Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 1E 3 RST 0 Default unit V Manual operation See Common Mode Offset on page 63 SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID PARTnumber Queries the R amp S part number of the probe Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values lt PartNumber gt Part number in a string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID SRNumber Queries the serial number of the probe Suffix lt p gt Return values
86. ABle SELect lt FileName gt This command selects a predefined channel table file for comparison during channel detection Before using this command the RECENT channel table must be switched on first with the command CONFigure CDPower CTABle STATe on page 170 Parameters lt FileName gt RST RECENT Example CONF WCDP CTAB ON Switches the channel table on CONF CDP CTAB SEL CTAB 1 Selects the predefined channel table CTAB 1 Manual operation See Selecting a Table on page 89 CONFigure CDPower CTABle STATe State This command switches the use of a predefined channel table on or off When switched on the measured channel table is stored under the name RECENT and is selected for use After the RECENT channel table is switched on another channel table can be selected with the command CONFigure CDPower CTABle SELect on page 170 10 5 6 3 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF CDP CTAB ON Manual operation See Using Predefined Channel Tables on page 89 Configuring Channel Tables Some general settings and functions are available when configuring a predefined channel table Remote commands exclusive to configuring channel tables CONFigure CDPower CTABle COMMent sessssssssssee tenen nennen enne nn nnne nene 171 CONFigureoDPower CTABIE NAME itc eee re rere Rea enata acer 171 GONFigure GDPowerGTABle DATA iu errore E E exe Ro
87. B eerte toD a RE RAN SNR NEIN ER AA 64 WIG GOR AE 64 Xr 155 1 MES MI I E E eaten 65 uror 65 BI C TE o NORD 65 M oic ENNIO 65 Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FSW itself for example when measuring the noise level of a DUT Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce on page 149 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW No further trigger parameters are available for the connector Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 161 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection on page 161 6 2 2 3 o Code Domain Analysis Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered
88. BTS application only Defines the measurement range for Channel Power measurements as a range of slots in the current TD SCDMA signal e g the downlink slots 4 to 6 for a Switching Point 3 Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SLOT STARt on page 181 SENSe POWer ACHannel SLOT STOP on page 181 Auto Level amp Time Adapting the Measurement to the Current Signal Automatically adjusts the reference level and the trigger offset to subframe start to their optimum levels for the current signal This prevents overloading the R amp S FSW When this function is activated current measurements are aborted and resumed after the automatic level detection is finished Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel AUTO LTIMe on page 180 Frequency and Time Domain Measurements 6 3 2 Signal Channel Power Measurements The Power measurement determines the TD SCDMA signal channel power in a single channel with a bandwidth of 1 2288 MHz In order to determine the signal power the TD SCDMA application performs a Channel Power measurement as in the Spectrum application with the following settings Table 6 2 Predefined settings for TD SCDMA Signal Channel Power measurements Standard TD SCDMA FWD UE TD SCDMA REV Number of adjacent channels 0 Frequency span 3 MHz Measurement bandwidth 1 6 MHz The main measurement menus and the configuration Overview for the RF measure ments are identical to the Spectrum
89. CDMA signal channel power The R amp S FSW measures the signal power in a single channel with a bandwidth of 1 2288 MHz The results are based on the root mean square R amp S FSW K76 K77 Measurements and Result Display CF 13 25 GHz 1001 pts 300 0 kHz Span 3 0 MHz 2 Channel Power TD SCDMA FWD Channel Bandwidth Offset Power 1 67 60 dBm 67 60 dBm Fig 3 18 Signal channel power measurement in TD SCDMA BTS application For details see chapter 6 3 2 Signal Channel Power Measurements on page 102 Remote command CONF CDP BTS MEAS POW see CONFigure CDPower MEASurement on page 133 Querying results CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CPOW see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESu1t on page 210 CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESul1t on page 210 Ch Power ACLR Channel Power ACLR performs an adjacent channel power measurement in the default setting according to TD SCDMA specifications adjacent channel leakage ratio The measurement range can be adapted to a slot range of the current TD SCDMA sig nal The R amp S FSW measures the channel power and the relative power of the adjacent channels and of the alternate channels The results are displayed below the diagram SSS Ee User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 33 R amp S FSW K76 K77 Measurements and Result Display eee e 1001 pts 1 16 MHz Span 11 6 MHz 2 Result a
90. CERES REST GONFigure CDPow r C TABIe SELG8Cct os corro ort ner rper eg teneo Fe oe nr SY Do UPPER EIE ETONE CONFigure CDPower CTABle STATe E GONFigure CDPower MEASUremeril 2 tcn rcr rette rere t Iba XR Errat de Fa Ee ERR Y Ee oa Pa SR ERR rios CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime LIS T3RESUIE escono rne eniro tert tent re eve Here ket e y area 199 CONFigure CDPower BTS PV Time LIST STATe in uit tr trennt ern ttn enn 228 CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime SFRames sid CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime SPOILDE contorno oseni EAn OnE AT EESTE A EEE DIAGnostic SERVICe NSOUFCG rnit c certus toad eine eie aasia epe Eaa DISPlay FORMAL AaiS BISHER DISPlay WINDoOwsrI SIZE err rrr tert e a D ipe BISPlay WINDowsri TRAGesE MODE ecco eorr men Raro eee ett tare sepe eth ESNEA DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE P DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MAXimum cessent enne DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MINimum eeeeeeeeeeeeennee nennen DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe PDlVision essen DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVVel sessi DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet essssseeeeeeeneeenenenneee 152 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSiti
91. E application User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 31 Frequency and Time Domain Measurements In order to perform the power check the TD SCDMA application must synchronize the transmit mask to the current signal as the mask is defined relative to a slot start The application measures the power in the defined number of subframes in the time domain and calculates the average power in the slots of interest It then compares the averaged power of the signal against the mask for allowed transmission power The mask consists of four defined intervals before the burst during fall time during the low time during the rise time Note For UE measurements the ON power is checked thus the mask is defined for the following intervals before the burst during the rise time e during the high time during fall time As a result the power vs time trace is displayed The result of the limit check Pass Fail is also indicated in the diagram The numeric results are provided in the List Evaluation result display see List Evalua tion on page 38 For details see chapter 6 3 1 Power vs Time on page 98 Remote command CONF CDP BTS MEAS PVT see CONFigure CDPower MEASurement on page 133 Querying results TRAC DATA TRACE1 see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 201 CALCulate n LIMit k FAIL on page 210 CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime LIST RESult on page 199 Power The Power measurement determines the TD S
92. Example SENS CDP NORM ON Activates the elimination of the I Q offset Manual operation See Compensate IQ Offset on page 110 SENSe CDPower PDISplay Mode This command switches between showing the absolute or relative power This parameter only affects the Code Domain Power evaluation Parameters Mode ABS REL ABSolute Absolute power levels RELative Power levels relative to total power of the data parts of the signal RST ABS Example SENS CDP PDIS ABS Manual operation See Code Power Display on page 110 SENSe CDPower PTS State If activated additional information on the DwPTS BTS mode or UpPTS UE mode is displayed in the Result Summary See also chapter 4 2 Frames Subframes and Slots on page 40 Configuring Frequency and Time Domain Measurements This parameter only affects the Code Domain Power evaluation Parameters State ON OFF ON PTS evaluation is activated OFF PTS evaluation is disabled RST OFF Example SENS CDP PTS ON Manual operation See Show DwPTS Results BTS mode on page 111 See Show UpPTS Results UE mode on page 111 10 6 Configuring Frequency and Time Domain Measure ments Frequency and time domain measurements are performed in the Spectrum application with some predefined settings as described in chapter 6 3 Frequency and Time Domain Measurements on page 98 For details on configuring these RF measurements in a remote environment see
93. II Activates all automatic adjustment functions for the current measurement settings This includes e Auto Level Auto Scale All on page 96 This function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master not for the applications Remote command SENSe ADJust ALL on page 174 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the full scale level are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized To determine the optimal reference level a level measurement is performed on the R amp S FSW Code Domain Analysis You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 96 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 176 Auto Scale Window Automatically determines the optimal range and reference level position to be dis played for the current measurement settings in the currently selected window No new measurement is performed Auto Scale All Automatically determines the optimal range and reference level position to be dis played for the current measurement settings in all displayed diagrams No new mea surement is performed Restore Scale Window Restores the default sc
94. INDOW rem m 185 LAYout REPLace WINDOW ecce eben tpud epic rata e Po nn cann bana cu ianiai aai 186 LAVOUES PIG d 186 odora BIe ppp 188 LAYoutWINDow n IDENItify cuius cien npn e ebbe apapa aaia iiaa 188 LAY out WINDOWESWIe REMOVE c ot E petet araa ia aA EE RAE esaet d x o Ran 188 LAYoutWINDOow shPREPLdaCe a cci cii drerit eve tate sta e cvv isa ca do Po vues 189 Configuring the Result Display LAYout ADD WINDow WindowName Direction WindowType This command adds a window to the display in the active measurement channel This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result To replace an existing window use the LAYout REPLace WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window the new win dow is inserted next to By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt Direction gt LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow Direction the new window is added relative to the existing win dow lt WindowType gt text value Type of result display evaluation method you want to add See the table below for available parameter values Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the comman
95. In particular the order of the XML elements must be respected i e iq tar uses an ordered XML schema For your own implementation of the iq tar file format make sure to validate your XML file against the given schema The following example shows an I Q parameter XML file The XML elements and attrib utes are explained in the following sections Q Parameter XML File Specification Sample I Q parameter XML file xyz xml lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 xml stylesheet type text xsl href open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt RS IQ TAR FileFormat fileFormatVersion 1 xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocation RsIqTar xsd xmlns xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance lt Name gt FSV K10 lt Name gt lt Comment gt Here is a comment lt Comment gt lt DateTime gt 2011 01 24T14 02 49 lt DateTime gt lt Samples gt 68751 lt Samples gt lt Clock unit Hz gt 6 5e 006 lt Clock gt lt Format gt complex lt Format gt lt DataType gt float32 lt DataType gt lt ScalingFactor unit V gt 1 lt ScalingFactor gt lt NumberOfChannels gt 1 lt NumberOfChannels gt lt DataFilename gt xyz complex float32 lt DataFilename gt lt UserData gt lt UserDefinedElement gt Example lt UserDefinedElement gt lt UserData gt lt PreviewData gt lt PreviewData gt lt RS_IQ TAR FileFormat gt Element Description RS IQ TAR File The root element of the XML file It must contain the attribute il
96. Lscale AUTO State This command defines whether the full scale level i e the maximum input power on the Baseband Input connector is defined automatically according to the reference level or manually Parameters State ON Automatic definition OFF Manual definition according to INPut 10 FULLscale LEVel on page 144 RST ON Example INP IQ FULL AUTO OFF Manual operation See Full Scale Level Mode Value on page 75 INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel lt PeakVoltage gt This command defines the peak voltage at the Baseband Input connector if the full scale level is set to manual mode see 1NPut 10 FULLscale AUTO on page 144 Parameters lt PeakVoltage gt 0 25V 0 5V 1V 2V Peak voltage level at the connector For probes the possible full scale values are adapted according to the probe s attenuation and maximum allowed power RST 1V Example INP IQ FULL 0 5V Manual operation See Full Scale Level Mode Value on page 75 INPut IQ TYPE lt DataType gt This command defines the format of the input signal Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameters lt DataType gt lIQ 1 Q IQ The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two input channels are required for each input signal one for the in phase component and one for the quadrature compo nent l The in phase component of the input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center
97. M CDP ERR SUMMary RSUMmary Result Summary XPOW CDP RATio SCONst Symbol Constellation XTIM CDP SYMB EVM SEVM Symbol EVM Use SENS CDP PDIS ABS REL subsequently to change the scaling 10 15 Programming Examples TD SCDMA BTS CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime LIST STATe State This command hides or shows the list evaluation result display Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the LAYout commands for new remote control programs see chapter 10 7 2 Working with Win dows in the Display on page 182 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF SENSe CDPower LEVel ADJust This command adjusts the reference level to the measured channel power This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSW or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Note that this command is retained for compatibility reasons only For new R amp S FSW programs use SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 176 Programming Examples TD SCDMA BTS The following programming examples are meant to demonstrate the operation of the R amp S FSWTD SCDMA application in a remote environment They are performed with an R amp S FSW equipped with option R amp S FSW K76 Only the commands required to control the R amp S FSW K76 application are provided not the signal generator The measurements are performed
98. Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 161 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection on page 161 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 162 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 161 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger cport PULSe LENGth on page 162 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defin
99. PTS Results For CDA measurements the LIST parameter returns the following results for the Downlink Pilot Time Slot DwPTS or Uplink Pilot Time Slot UpPTS lt State gt lt Power gt lt Rho gt lt EVM RMS gt lt EVM peak e State Indicates whether DwPTS UpPTS slot is active Power Power in the DwPTS UpPTS slot Rho RHO for the DwPTS UpPTS slot EVM RMS gt EVM RMS for the DwPTS UpPTS slot e e e e EVM peak EVM Peak for the DwPTS UpPTS slot TRACe lt n gt DATA X lt TraceNumber gt This command queries the horizontal trace data for each sweep point in the specified window for example the frequency in frequency domain or the time in time domain measurements This is especially useful for traces with non equidistant x values e g for SEM or Spuri ous Emissions measurements Query parameters lt TraceNumber gt Trace number TRACE1 TRACE6 Example TRAC3 X TRACE1 Returns the x values for trace 1 in window 3 Usage Query only 10 9 3 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt The evaluation method selected by the LAY ADD WIND command also affects the results of the trace data query see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 201 Details on the returned trace data depending on the evaluation method are provided here For details on the graphical results of these evaluation methods see chapter 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis on
100. Q 1 Q Mode Input Config Analog Baseband d tM High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RF IQ File Signal Path LUCO ESL NCO v redes For more information on the optional Analog Baseband Interface see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual If Analog Baseband input is used measurements in the frequency and time domain are not available Code Domain Analysis Analog Baseband Input SES cuanto ndr ee tma e d eu edidere dud 68 f o3 a 68 Tae gj UI NANT TT 68 High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RE echa 69 e mail 69 Analog Baseband Input State Enables or disable the use of the Analog Baseband input source for measurements Analog Baseband is only available if the optional Analog Baseband Interface is instal led Remote command INPut SELect on page 138 I Q Mode Defines the format of the input signal For more information on I Q data processing modes see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual jQ The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two inputs are required for a complex signal one for the in phase component and one for the quadrature component Only Low IF I The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT I connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is set to 0 Hz the real b
101. R amp S FSW K76 K77 TD SCDMA Measurements Options User Manual P Midamble annel Channel SF Symbol EVM Modulation Type Sync Found 1173 9328 02 12 Test amp Measurement ROHDE amp SCHWARZ User Manual This manual applies to the following R amp S FSW models with firmware version 2 22 and higher R amp S9 FSWS 1312 8000K08 R amp S FSW13 1312 8000K13 R amp S9FSW26 1312 8000K26 R amp S FSW43 1312 8000K43 R amp S FSW50 1312 8000K50 R amp S FSW67 1312 8000K67 R amp S FSW85 1312 8000K85 The following firmware options are described e R amp S FSW K76 1313 1445 02 e R amp S FSW K77 1313 1451 02 The firmware of the instrument makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgement on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2015 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manu
102. RACED DATAT eee S E een ea E cee EE 201 TRIGger SEQuence BBPower HOLDOff isens eorr rr rre rry rennen TRIGger SEQuence HOLDofft TIME trt rt traen nre rennen TRIGger SEQuericeLTEPowWwer FIOLDOI T ss corrente ow stent ATERA OTE E oS EFE PX scare eH EE ES XH EXER Cu nav TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis TRIGger SEQuence LL EVel BBBOWeL rre mr err e tne rr iri er rhe E EX Soda TRIGger SEQuerice E EHEVellEXETenalsports xncu enceinte ethos eon eit rre tar sera rent 158 TRIGger SEQUENCE SLOPBe n tre retener tree o n Gn died er i ea n itp TRIGger SEQuence SOURce Index A Aborting iP 93 94 AC DC coupling adeste itin epa eee oer mde cad 56 ACLR Configuration TD SCDMA e 102 Results remote i TD SCDMA results scettr nte 33 Activating TD SCDMA measurements remote 129 Active probe MICrODUEEOR ice cp od Pope rtc bd Led 63 Adjacent channel leakage ratio See ACER ciet opino esee a 33 Amplitude Analog Baseband Interface B71 settings 73 COMIQUT ATION Pe re Raa Configuration remote if uuerpe t M 70 Analog Baseband Amplitude Settings voco otc on tr tec coe 73 Input icon we Input settings Analog Baseband B71 Full scale level pet oa E ERU D dal 75 WOOP Ei RR a AA 61 68 Input type remote control sseese 144 Analog Baseband Interface B71 Amplitude settings
103. REV Number of adjacent channels 2 For further details about the ACLR measurements refer to Measuring Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power in the R amp S FSW User Manual To restore adapted measurement parameters the following parameters are saved on exiting and are restored on re entering this measurement e Reference level and reference level offset e RBW VBW e Sweep time e Span e Number of adjacent channels e Fast ACLR mode The main measurement menus and the configuration Overview for the RF measure ments are identical to the Spectrum application However an additional function is pro vided to adapt the ACLR measurement to the current TD SCDMA signal Adapting the Measurement to the Current Signal 103 L Start Slot Stop o ENIM 103 D ir rap E rnnt 103 Adapting the Measurement to the Current Signal You can adapt the measurement range to the current TD SCDMA signal Start Slot Stop Slot Adapting the Measurement to the Current Signal BTS application only Defines the measurement range for Channel Power measurements as a range of slots in the current TD SCDMA signal e g the downlink slots 4 to 6 for a Switching Point 3 Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SLOT STARt on page 181 SENSe POWer ACHannel SLOT STOP on page 181 Auto Level amp Time Adapting the Measurement to the Current Signal Automatically adjusts the reference level and the trigger offset
104. S Manual operation See Set Count on page 84 10 5 5 Synchronization The individual channels in the input signal need to be synchronized to detect timing off sets in the slot spacings These commands are described here Configuring Code Domain Analysis Remote commands exclusive to synchronization ISENSaeJTCDPONWOBMSEIE 22 rtu t eret t etae nette Etat d ee t Y Eee ee org de 165 SENSe CBPower SCODO 2 diei ceni eo tis dea pee b d addo OL ERE ax uc cH ud 165 SENSE JCDPOWERS TOlOL 1er eere tre RR Pee xr te Cac A ete edu x RE ATA RRR stake 165 SENSe1CDPowWwerS T9LEoUMODE nerd irent eere eate corp pe ico dr RE gana uk ada e iaia 166 SENSeTCDPowWwer S TSbot RO Tale tete ttt er reel e ede RS 167 SENSedCDPoOwWenS UE euer tuna aE er ade eoe ke ERE AREE 167 EU Sei CO ROWER REF e EP 167 SENSe CDPower MSHift lt MaxMAShift gt This command sets the maximum number of usable midamble shifts number of users on the base station If you use a predefined channel table this value is replaced by that of the channel table see CONFigure CDPower CTABle MSHift on page 173 Parameters lt MaxMAShift gt Range 2 to 16 Increment 2 RST 16 Example CDP MSH 10 Sets the maximum number of midamble shifts to 10 Manual operation See MA Shift Cell Number of Users on page 85 SENSe CDPower SCODe lt numeric value gt This command sets the scrambling code of the base station Parameters lt numeri
105. SCDMA RF measurements Retrieving Results See also chapter 10 9 3 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt on page 204 CAWC stein LIMER FAWN lem xx E 210 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer ssb RESUIt een 210 CALCE MARK ME Y 2 d iedeen t centu eruta baa d eae ae eu dla it Reo 212 GAL Gulatesmss TATISI ST ERE SUE SES asc Sceiacs i tetepu cet coss er case tro Ry epe ocu FED EP Qe d eb oatu S 212 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL This command queries the result of a limit check To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 193 Return values lt Result gt 0 PASS 1 FAIL Example INIT WAI Starts a new sweep and waits for its end CALC LIM3 FAIL Queries the result of the check for limit line 3 Usage Query only SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Power vs Time on page 31 See Spectrum Emission Mask on page 34 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult lt Measurement gt This command queries the results of power measurements lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is
106. Spectrum R amp S FSW B160R RTIM Real Time Spectrum K160RE DOCSIS 3 1 R amp S FSW K192 DOCSis DOCSIS 3 1 Note the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel INSTrument REName lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command renames a measurement channel Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the channel you want to rename User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 132 10 4 Selecting a Measurement lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the new channel name Note that you can not assign an existing channel name to a new channel this will cause an error Example INST REN TQAnalyzer2 IQAnalyzer3 Renames the channel with the name IQAnalyzer2 to IQAna lyzer3 Usage Setting only INSTrument SELect Mode This command activates a new measurement channel with the defined channel type or selects an existing measurement channel with the specified name Also see INSTrument CREate NEW on page 130 Parameters Mode BTDS TD SCDMA BTS mode R amp S FSW K76 option MTDS TD SCDMA UE mode R amp S FSW K77 option SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute This command restores the default instrument settings in the current channel Use INST SEL to select the channel Example INST Spectrum2 Selects the channel fo
107. T 0 dBm coupled to reference level Example DISP TRAC Y RVAL 20dBm Sets the power value assigned to the reference position to 20 dBm INPut GAIN STATe State This command turns the preamplifier on and off It requires the optional preamplifiier hardware This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier on page 73 10 5 2 3 Configuring Code Domain Analysis INPut GAIN VALue Gain This command selects the gain level if the preamplifier is activated INP GAIN STAT ON see INPut GAIN STATe on page 153 The command requires the additional preamplifier hardware option Parameters Gain 15 dB 30 dB The availability of gain levels depends on the model of the R amp S FSW R amp S FSW8 13 15dB and 30 dB R amp S FSW26 or higher 30 dB All other values are rounded to the nearest of these two RST OFF Example INP GAIN VAL 30 Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier on page 73 Configuring the Attenuation NFPHEATTODUSOE oie edo oc our se eo uo etra cu se era raa io eque nde aestus Coi Ein E EDe ER RR RIP A EEOAE 154 INPutATTeniuattonjAU TO enean nete nnne det d eee de teinte d pen nace atr ea det cen du Ead 155 INPUT ATW E
108. T aee EY ge Fa can MMEMory STOResh IO COMMEN erns anars ree censor tere eek er Yep Cru eFT UE eek PUES EER EENES MMEMory STORe n IQ S TATe r eret re rer re nr ed ne e EYE X da Fe EE XE REPE VEN Dea ge MMEMory STOResn TRAGS tcrra nr ere e nre yt Fx e Eee kA sevecsne ERE FR ETe DX c dera RR KR ERA FEE SERRA S SUID UNG T c OUTPut DIQ CDEVICG tec tert pn ener een certet ttp en eben ced pre epe er ct ee e ets OUTPut IRIGger portz DIRGCIOR onu rer err rere ntn ere err eta tr eee e Rao cias eU PUEMRIGGErS port MEV Sl irs OUTPut TRIGgersport OTYPBe artt rene een ntn ree eene tats OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe IMMediate OUTPutTRIGgersport PULSSiEBENGID ucc cuocere rrr tero era repe aae PES gere nee p eu yeeb ege aper COPI eae creen e STATus QUEStionable SYNG CONDIIOT T trennen e n Hee eren erp n anres 225 STAT s QUEStionable SYNGC ENABIG 2 1 inet reiner E dace Dee eget eH o eo Le cR EHE EA 226 STATus QUEStionable SYNG NTRaTFISIUOTD recon etit bene ever tmr e Die eee pev sg eek ea ek nea ceret 226 STATus QUEStionable S YNG P TRatrisilloh oon rte rne ten nte ren ran 226 STAT s QUEStionable S YNG EEVENt iiie ior tre irte eec hi ir trea E RE E 225 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute SYS TEMISEQUONCE Meee decrees cle nee e ei aaia TNE AN E ETE AT a TRAGeSNSEDATAJA Paissan aa E EEE EA a A E EET IAE 204 T
109. The TD SCDMA BTS application can also be used to analyze data in MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA applications receive an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the application data For the TD SCDMA BTS application in MSRA operating mode the application data range is defined by the same settings used to define the signal cap ture in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the analysis interval for the TD SCDMA BTS measurement Data coverage for each active application Generally if a signal contains multiple data channels for multiple standards separate applications are used to analyze each data channel Thus it is of interest to know which application is analyzing which data channel The MSRA Master display indicates the data covered by each application restricted to the channel bandwidth used by the corresponding standard for TD SCDMA 1 6 MHz by vertical blue lines labeled with the application name Analysis interval However the individual result displays of the application need not analyze the com plete data range The data range that is actually analyzed by the individual result dis play is referred to as the analysis interval In the TD SCDMA BTS application the analysis interval is automatically determined according to the selected cha
110. Vel EXTernal port cessere 158 RiGee SEQUENCE SEDES adiuti ca d Retreat eel re rere Er eaa eels 159 TRIGger SEQuence S OU RGe 1 2 rane ck a aou nI PEE EU RETE eA Dr EYE ETE ER Ei 159 Configuring Code Domain Analysis TRIGger SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the baseband power trigger event The command requires the optional Digital Baseband Interface or the optional Analog Baseband Interface Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 157 command for new remote control programs Parameters Period Range 150 ns to 1000s RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR BBP Sets the baseband power trigger source TRIG BBP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement Parameters Offset RST 0s Example TRIG HOLD 500us Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 81 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event Note that this command can be used for any trigger source not just IF Power despite the legacy keyword Note If you perform gated measurements in combination with the IF Power trigger the R amp S FSW ignores the holding time for frequency sweep FFT s
111. Ximum PEAK on page 220 Search Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the minimum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK on page 219 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum PEAK on page 220 Error Messages 8 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Mea 8 1 surement If the results do not meet your expectations try the following methods to optimize the measurement Synchronization fails e Check the frequency Check the reference level e When using an external trigger check whether an external trigger is being sent to the R amp S FSW e Check the carrier frequency error see chapter 3 1 1 Code Domain Parame ters on page 14 Frequency differences between the transmitter and receiver of more than 1 0 kHz impair synchronization of the Code Domain Power measurement If at all possible the transmitter and the receiver should be synchronized e Check the chip rate error A large chip rate error results in symbol errors and therefore in possible synchronization errors for code domain measurements EVM and Error results are too high Only the channels detected as being active are used to generate the ideal reference signal If a channel is not detected as being active e g on account of low power the difference between the test signal and the reference signal and therefore the compo site EVM and code domain errors
112. a and measurement settings This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSW or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Example ADJ LEV Usage Event Manual operation See Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 71 10 5 9 Evaluation Range The evaluation range defines which data is evaluated in the result display SENSe ICD Power COD m 176 Eius Bleu ici iT EET 177 SENSE CDPOWe SLOT E 177 SENSe CDPower CODE lt CodeNumber gt This command sets the code number The code number refers to spreading factor 16 Parameters lt CodeNumber gt lt numeric value gt RST 0 Example SENS CDP CODE 3 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Manual operation See Channel Code Number on page 108 SENSe CDPower SET lt SetNo gt This command selects a specific set for further analysis The number of sets to capture has to be defined with the SENSe CDPower SET command before using this com mand Parameters lt SetNo gt Range 0 to SET COUNT 1 Increment 1 RST 0 Example CDP SET COUN 10 Selects the 10th set for further analysis Manual operation See Set to Analyze on page 84 SENSe CDPower SLOT lt SlotNumber gt This command selects the slot number to be evaluated The number of slots to capture has to be defined with the SENSe CDPowe
113. a bee 50 Configuration remote sssse 181 Result Display 55 ince eem rera ent eR rege 10 Result displays DiagEalti ctor eere rear eres ie he t List Evaluation Marker table 2 etn nennt Peak lisl ise onte ertet s RESUItSUMIMANY 2 etre ennt renes 38 Result summary Channel results x Evaluation 27 General results c tri memes 14 Ere 208 Result Summary Evaluation Metho snerist esiisade ine 38 List Evaluation method e 38 Isesult display ren rre etn RESUS nente Calculated remote Data format remote Evaluating Exporting remote T Retrieving remote esee RE tefnole ctione rere D ce dta Trace remote sis Trace data query remote T Updating the display eren 94 Updating the display remote sssss 223 Retrieving Calculated results remote sssssss 197 Results remote 5 nee etg 196 RF Results remote oe Trace results remote sess 200 RF attenuation P ro PE 72 Manual RE IDDUL itn erret nete rene eene orn tuens Connector remote etienne rte ea Overload protection remote REMOT A ves aare aaisa ass RF measurements PCI 108 Configuration Configuration remote essseseeeenee 179 MSRA uisaute enr dites 30 Performing
114. al R amp S9FSW is abbreviated as R amp S FSW R amp S FSW K76 and R amp S FSW K77 are abbreviated as R amp S FSW K76 K77 R amp S FSW K76 K77 Contents 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 2 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 5 1 6 1 6 2 6 3 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 8 1 Preface deseri ciihede EA rico Vos Eoadl Edw Oc ose E E A E EA 5 About this Manual x a i rena ide ao pla acus ka ek ca vu ra avx Esa ace Da vice ask Ya oo DO ERE RR CUR EY VR AR VE SERO 5 Documentation Overview eese erneuern nna n nana nu ana a anu aa aaa aa aa ga aa Rana 6 Conventions Used in the Documentation eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee nennen nennen nnn 7 Welcome to the TD SCDMA Applications 9 Starting the TD SCDMA Application eeeeeeeseeseesseeeeeeeenene nnne nenne 9 Understanding the Display Information eee 10 Measurements and Result Display 13 Code Domain AnalysiS nni tereti sonsnadecsentaseadonadnwentessxaeneusdesanessncueoceestnxnsknnssaceen 13 Frequency and Time Domain Measurements esee 30 Measurement BasicCs eese nennen anke n nne n arant 40 Short Introduction to TD SCDMA eeeeeeeeee eene nnne nnne nnn nnsn nhau rana nau 40 Frames Subframes and Slots 1 1 1 leseee ee ese esses sese eee nn
115. ale settings in the currently selected window Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto Resets the measurement duration for automatic settings to the default value Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 175 Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual This function allows you to change the measurement duration for automatic setting adjustments Enter the value in seconds Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 175 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 174 Upper Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last mea surement before the reference level is adapted automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer on page 176 Lower Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last mea surement before the ref
116. ality that the application pro vides including remote control operation Functions that are not discussed in this manual are the same as in the Spectrum appli cation and are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual The latest version is available for download at the product homepage http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html Installation You can find detailed installation instructions in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual or in the Release Notes 2 1 Starting the TD SCDMA Application The TD SCDMA measurements require a special application on the R amp S FSW To activate the TD SCDMA applications 1 Select the MODE key A dialog box opens that contains all operating modes and applications currently available on your R amp S FSW 2 Select the TD SCDMA BTS or TD SCDMA UE item The R amp S FSW opens a new measurement channel for the TD SCDMA application A Code Domain Analysis measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be configured in the TD SCDMA Overview dialog box which is displayed when R amp S FSW K76 K77 Welcome to the TD SCDMA Applications 2 2 you select the Overview softkey from any menu see chapter 6 2 1 Configuration Overview on page 53 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function When you activate an application a new measurement channel is created which deter mines the measurement settings for that application The same application can be act
117. amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual jQ The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two inputs are required for a complex signal one for the in phase component and one for the quadrature component Only Low IF The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT I connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is set to 0 Hz the real baseband signal is dis played without down conversion Real Baseband l If a center frequency greater than 0 Hz is set the input signal is down converted with the center frequency Low IF I Q Only Low IF Q The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT Q connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is set to 0 Hz the real baseband signal is dis played without down conversion Real Baseband Q If a center frequency greater than O Hz is set the input signal is down converted with the center frequency Low IF Q Remote command INPut IO TYPE on page 144 Input Configuration Defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all four Analog Base band connectors or as a plain I Q signal via two simple ended lines Note Both single ended and differential probes are supported as input however since only one connector is occupied by a probe the Single ended setting must be used for all probes Single Ended l Q data only
118. analyzed at a glance Dum moe eue usw a a User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 19 R amp S FSW K76 K77 Measurements and Result Display 3 Code Domain Error Power ei Clrw 1 Code Fig 3 3 Code Domain Error Power Display for TD SCDMA BTS measurements The codes are displayed using the following colors e yellow detected channels e red selected channel if a channel is made up of more than one code all codes that belong to the channel are red e green no channel detected Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CDEPower see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 183 TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 201 Composite Constellation In the Composite Constellation result display the constellation points of the 864 chips are displayed for the specified slot This data is determined inside the DSP even before the channel search Thus it is not possible to assign constellation points to channels The constellation points are displayed normalized with respect to the total power Note The red circle indicates the value 1 User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 20 R amp S FSW K76 K77 Measurements and Result Display 1 Composite Constellation 1 Clrw Fig 3 4 Composite Constellation display for TD SCDMA BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CCONst see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 183 TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 201 Composite EVM The Composite EVM evaluation determines the error vector magnitude EVM over the total si
119. annel bar for firmware and measurement settings 2 3 Window title bar with diagram specific trace information 4 Diagram area 5 Diagram footer with diagram specific information 6 Instrument status bar with error messages progress bar and date time display MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode additional tabs and elements are available A colored back ground of the screen behind the measurement channel tabs indicates that you are in MSRA operating mode For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual Channel bar information In TD SCDMA applications when performing Code Domain Analysis the R amp S FSW screen display deviates from the Spectrum application For Frequency and time domain measurements the familiar settings are displayed see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Table 2 1 Hardware settings displayed in the channel bar in TD SCDMA applications for Code Domain Analysis Ref Level Reference level Att Mechanical and electronic RF attenuation Freq Center frequency for the RF signal Channel Channel number code number and spreading factor Slot Slot of the CPICH channel Code Power Power result mode e Absolute e Relative to total power of the data parts of the signal Symbol Rate Symbol rate of the current channel Window title bar information For each diagram the header provides the following information 1 Code Domain Power F
120. ant Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the sweep INIT SEQ REFR Refreshes the display for all channels Usage Event Retrieving Results SYSTem SEQuencer State This command turns the Sequencer on and off The Sequencer must be active before any other Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are executed otherwise an error will occur A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 The Sequencer is activated and a sequential measurement is started immediately OFF 0 The Sequencer is deactivated Any running sequential measure ments are stopped Further Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are not available RST 0 Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single Sequencer mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements SYST SEQ OFF 10 9 Retrieving Results The following commands are required to retrieve the results from a TD SCDMA mea surement in a remote environment When the channel type is required as a parameter by a remote command or provided as a result for a remote query abbreviations or assignments to a numeric value are used as described in chapter 10 5 6 C
121. application However an additional function is pro vided to adapt the CCDF measurement to the current TD SCDMA signal Adapting the Measurement to the Current Signal You can adapt the measurement range to the current TD SCDMA signal Frequency and Time Domain Measurements Start Slot Stop Slot Adapting the Measurement to the Current Signal BTS application only Defines the measurement range for Channel Power measurements as a range of slots in the current TD SCDMA signal e g the downlink slots 4 to 6 for a Switching Point 3 Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SLOT STARt on page 181 SENSe POWer ACHannel SLOT STOP on page 181 Auto Level amp Time Adapting the Measurement to the Current Signal Automatically adjusts the reference level and the trigger offset to subframe start to their optimum levels for the current signal This prevents overloading the R amp S FSW When this function is activated current measurements are aborted and resumed after the automatic level detection is finished Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel AUTO LTIMe on page 180 Evaluation Range 7 Analysis General result analysis settings concerning the evaluation range trace markers etc can be configured via the Analysis button in the Overview Analysis of RF Measurements General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers lines etc for RF mea surements are identical to the analysis functions in th
122. application However an additional function is pro vided to adapt the Power measurement to the current TD SCDMA signal Adapting the Measurement to the Current Signal You can adapt the measurement range to the current TD SCDMA signal Start Slot Stop Slot Adapting the Measurement to the Current Signal BTS application only Defines the measurement range for Channel Power measurements as a range of slots in the current TD SCDMA signal e g the downlink slots 4 to 6 for a Switching Point 3 Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SLOT STARt on page 181 SENSe POWer ACHannel SLOT STOP on page 181 Auto Level amp Time Adapting the Measurement to the Current Signal Automatically adjusts the reference level and the trigger offset to subframe start to their optimum levels for the current signal This prevents overloading the R amp S FSW When this function is activated current measurements are aborted and resumed after the automatic level detection is finished Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel AUTO LTIMe on page 180 6 3 3 Channel Power ACLR Measurements Channel Power ACLR measurements are performed as in the Spectrum application with the following predefined settings according to TD SCDMA specifications adjacent channel leakage ratio Frequency and Time Domain Measurements Table 6 3 Predefined settings for TD SCDMA ACLR Channel Power measurements Standard TD SCDMA FWD UE TD SCDMA
123. arches may be performed The search results can be influenced by special settings These settings are available as softkeys in the Marker To menu or in the Search tab of the Marker dialog box To display this tab do one of the following Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey Then select the hori zontal Search tab e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker Config tab Then select the horizontal Search tab Then select the Search tab res User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 115 7 4 4 Markers Analysis Markers Marker Settings Search Range Next Code Domain Settings Trace Marker Sle 1 Code Domain Power Search Mode for Next Peak sssssssssssssssessseseneteetenenenentretesss ene si stis sse sn saca 116 Search Mode for Next Peak Selects the search mode for the next peak search Left Determines the next maximum minimum to the left of the current peak Absolute Determines the next maximum minimum to either side of the current peak Right Determines the next maximum minimum to the right of the current peak Remote command chapter 10 10 2 3 Positioning the Marker on page 217 Marker Positioning Functions The following functions set the currently selected marker to the result of a peak search These functions are available as softkeys in the Marker To menu which is displayed when you press the MKR gt key
124. aseband signal is dis played without down conversion Real Baseband l If a center frequency greater than 0 Hz is set the input signal is down converted with the center frequency Low IF I Q Only Low IF Q The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT Q connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is set to 0 Hz the real baseband signal is dis played without down conversion Real Baseband Q If a center frequency greater than 0 Hz is set the input signal is down converted with the center frequency Low IF Q Remote command INPut IO TYPE On page 144 Input Configuration Defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all four Analog Base band connectors or as a plain I Q signal via two simple ended lines Note Both single ended and differential probes are supported as input however since only one connector is occupied by a probe the Single ended setting must be used for all probes Single Ended Q data only 6 2 3 Code Domain Analysis Differential l Q and inverse 1 Q data Not available for R amp S FSW85 Remote command INPut IQ BALanced STATe on page 143 High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RF Activates a mode with enhanced timing accuracy between analog baseband RF and external trigger signals Note Prerequisites for previous models of R amp S FSW For R amp S FSW models with a serial number lower than 103000 special p
125. assumed DataFilename Contains the filename of the I Q data binary file that is part of the iq tar file It is recommended that the filename uses the following convention lt xyz gt lt Format gt lt Channels gt ch lt Type gt e xyz a valid Windows file name e Format complex polar or real see Format element e Channels Number of channels see NumberOfChannels element e Type float32 float64 int8 int16 int32 or int64 see DataType element Examples xyz complex 1ch float32 e xyz polar 1ch float64 e xyzreal 1ch int16 xyz complex 16ch int8 UserData Optional contains user application or device specific XML data which is not part of the iq tar specification This element can be used to store additional information e g the hardware configuration User data must be valid XML content PreviewData Optional contains further XML elements that provide a preview of the I Q data The preview data is determined by the routine that saves an iq tar file e g R amp S FSW For the definition of this element refer to the RsIqTar xsd schema Note that the preview can be only displayed by current web browsers that have JavaScript enabled and if the XSLT stylesheet open IgTar xml file in web browser xslt is available Example ScalingFactor Q Parameter XML File Specification Data stored as int16 and a desired full scale voltage of 1 V ScalingFactor 1 V maximum int16 value 1 V
126. asurement data Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Hints and tips on how to handle errors and optimize the test setup How to Perform Measurements in TD SCDMA Applications The basic procedure to perform each measurement and step by step instructions for more complex tasks or alternative methods e Measurement Examples Detailed measurement examples to guide you through typical measurement sce narios and allow you to try out the application immediately e Remote Commands for TD SCDMA Measurements Remote commands required to configure and perform TD SCDMA measurements in a remote environment sorted by tasks Commands required to set up the environment or to perform common tasks on the instrument are provided in the main R amp S FSW User Manual Programming examples demonstrate the use of many commands and can usually be executed directly for test purposes List of remote commands Alphahabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual Index User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 5 Documentation Overview 1 2 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSW consists of the following parts e Printed Getting Started manual e Online Help system on the instrument e Documentation CD ROM with Getting Started User Manuals for base unit and firmware applications Service Manual Release Notes Data sheet and product brochures Online Help The Online Help is embedded in the in
127. ata Fields and Midambles on page 45 Remote command CONFigure CDPower CTABle ORDer on page 177 Show DwPTS Results BTS mode Displays additional information on the Downlink Pilot Time Slot DwPTS see also chapter 4 2 Frames Subframes and Slots on page 40 in the Result Summary Remote command SENSe CDPower PTS on page 178 Show UpPTS Results UE mode Displays additional information on the Uplink Pilot Time Slot UpPTS see also chap ter 4 2 Frames Subframes and Slots on page 40 in the Result Summary Remote command SENSe CDPower PTS on page 178 Traces The trace settings determine how the measured data is analyzed and displayed on the Screen Sze 1 Code Domain Power In CDA evaluations only one trace can be active in each diagram at any time Markers 7 4 Window specific configuration The settings in this dialog box are specific to the selected window To configure the settings for a different window select the window outside the displayed dialog box or select the window from the Specifics for selection list in the dialog box Trace Mode Defines the update mode for subsequent traces Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each measurement This is the default setting Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves each trace point in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than th
128. ated must be selected first using the INST SEL command This command is not available if the MSRA Master channel is selected Example INST SEL IQAnalyzer INST CRE DUPL Duplicates the channel named IQAnalyzer and creates a new measurement channel named IQAnalyzer2 Usage Event INSTrument CREate NEW lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command adds an additional measurement channel The number of measurement channels you can configure at the same time depends on available memory Parameters lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 131 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 131 Example INST CRE IQ IQAnalyzer2 Adds an additional I Q Analyzer channel named IQAnalyzer2 INSTrument CREate REPLace lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command replaces a measurement channel with another one Activating the TD SCDMA Applications Setting parameters ChannelName1 String containing the name of the measurement channel you want to replace lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of availabl
129. atio in dB CNO Carrier to noise measurements Returns the C N ratio referenced to a 1 Hz bandwidth in dBm Hz CPOWer Channel power measurements Returns the channel power The unit of the return values depends on the scaling of the y axis logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit linear scaling returns the power in W For SEM measurements the return value is the channel power of the reference range in the specified sub block PPOWer Peak power measurements Returns the peak power The unit of the return values depends on the scaling of the y axis logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit linear scaling returns the power in W Retrieving Results For SEM measurements the return value is the peak power of the reference range in the specified sub block OBANdwidth OBWidth Occupied bandwidth Returns the occupied bandwidth in Hz Usage Query only Manual operation See Power on page 32 See Ch Power ACLR on page 33 See Spectrum Emission Mask on page 34 See Occupied Bandwidth on page 35 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the position of a marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n g
130. ation to be considered in the automatic chan nel search In low SNR environments it may be necessary to limit the channel search to lower modulations than 64QAM 10 5 6 2 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameters lt ModType gt QPSK Consider QPSK modulation only PSK8 Consider QPSK and 8PSK modulation QAM16 Consider QPSK 8PSK and 16QAM modulation QAM64 Consider QPSK 8PSK 16QAM and 64QAM modulation RST QAM64 Example SENS CDP MMAX PSK8 Assume QPSK and 8PSK modulations only for the automatic channel search Manual operation See Max Modulation on page 88 Managing Channel Tables GONFigure GDPower CTABle CAT AO G soa secs crure teer tutto sce rr nba tt rpg ke cea RR HR ERR 169 CONFigtire CD Power EABle OOBY 122 reae sos tapa iai iaar apiid 170 CONFigure cDPower C TABlIeDELele 2 xe cits cnet t dtr ere te let eer nente tea 170 GONFigure CDPower CTABle SELect 1 erc nanni Es aieo va yo VR EYE TEL NiS 170 GONFigure GDPower C TABle STAT6 2 crt Letra perte RR kRRe RD RERIAE 170 CONFigure CDPower CTABle CATalog This command queries the names of all the channel tables stored on the instrument for the current application The first two result values are global values for all channel tables the subsequent val ues are listed for each individual table The syntax for the return values is lt TotalSize gt lt FreeMem gt FileName lt FileSize gt lt FileName gt lt Fil
131. ative Code Domain Power 234 e Measurement 5 Measuring the Composite EVM eseeenen 234 e Measurement 6 Determining the Peak Code Domain Error 235 e Measurement 7 Checking the Power vs Time 236 10 15 14 Measurement 1 Measuring the Signal Channel Power f 22B x9e Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Activate a TD SCDMA BTS measurement channel named BTSMeasurement INST CRE NEW BTDS BTSMeasurement Set the reference level to 0 dBm DISP TRAC Y SCAL RLEV 0 Set the center frequency to 2 1175 GHz FREQ CENT 2 1175 GHz Select the power measurement CONF CDP MEAS POW f seBEBER Configuring the measurement Set the slot range to analyze downlink data from slots 3 to 7 switching point 2 SENS POW ACH SLOT STAR 3 SENS POW ACH SLOT STOP 7 Automatically set the reference level and trigger to frame values according to measured levels and time SENS POW ACH AUTO LTIM 10 15 2 Programming Examples TD SCDMA BTS Performing the measurement Stops continuous sweep INIT CONT OFF Sets the number of sweeps to be performed to 10 SWE COUN 10 Start a new measurement with 10 sweeps and wait for the end INIT WAI 9 2 2 Retrieving results Retrieves the calculated total power value of the signal channel CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CPOW Result
132. aximum number of users in a single cell for channel detection using the predefined table This value replaces the global value defined by MA Shift Cell Number of Users on page 85 For details see chapter 4 4 Data Fields and Midambles on page 45 Remote command CONFigure CDPower CTABle MSHift on page 173 Adding a Channel Inserts a new row in the channel table to define another channel Deleting a Channel Deletes the currently selected channel from the table Creating a New Channel Table from the Measured Signal Measure Table Creates a completely new channel table according to the current measurement data Remote command CONFigure CDPower MEASurement on page 133 Sorting the Table by Midamble BTS application only Sorting by midamble means that after each midamble the corresponding code is lis ted The R amp S FSW automatically distinguishes between common and default midam ble assignment The assignment of code to midamble is specified in the TD SCDMA standard If neither a common nor a default midamble assignment is found sorting is in code order For details see chapter 4 4 Data Fields and Midambles on page 45 Sorting the Table by Code The midambles are sorted according to their midamble shifts Active and inactive chan nels are projected to a spreading factor of 16 and sorted according to their code num bers Selecting the Slot to Evaluate The application analyzes a single slot over the tota
133. ays the status of the Digital Baseband Interface connection If an instrument is connected the following information is displayed Name and serial number of the instrument connected to the Digital Baseband Inter face Used port e Sample rate of the data currently being transferred via the Digital Baseband Inter face Level and unit that corresponds to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 Full Scale Level if provided by connected instrument Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 139 DiglConf Starts the optional R amp S DiglConf application This function is available in the In Output menu but only if the optional software is installed Note that R amp S DiglConf requires a USB connection not LAN from the R amp S FSW to the R amp S EX IQ BOX in addition to the Digital Baseband Interface connection R amp S DiglConf version 2 20 360 86 Build 170 or higher is required To return to the R amp S FSW application press any key The R amp S FSW application is dis played with the Input Output menu regardless of which key was pressed For details on the R amp S DiglConf application see the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Inter face Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Note If you close the R amp S DiglConf window using the Close icon the window is minimized not closed Code Domain Analysis If you select the File gt Exit menu item in the R amp S DiglConf window the application is closed Note
134. between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Peak List towards the top 70 of the screen The following commands have the exact same effect as any combination of windows above and below the splitter moves the splitter vertically AY SPL 3 2 70 AY SPL 4 1 70 AY SPL 2 1 70 User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 187 Configuring the Result Display LAY out WINDow lt n gt ADD lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt This command adds a measurement window to the display Note that with this com mand the suffix n determines the existing window next to which the new window is added as opposed to LAYout ADD WINDow for which the existing window is defined by a parameter To replace an existing window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace command This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result Parameters Direction LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to add See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 183 for a list of availa ble window types Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY WIND1 ADD LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify This command queries the nam
135. binary data description 242 Export file parameter description 238 Exporting if Exporting remote eecena oett nente tte 221 IM POMING ico conet crt ck ee i ties D ewe Dee 49 52 Irnporting remote terrens eee 221 Importing Exporting 48 VQ imbalance i 14 lem 14 IF Power JG geri cec ert emet enters ii s reto cedo e 80 Impedance Iste 137 ifr ov atearsalts na A E EEA 56 Importing VQ data nci ettet I Q data remote epi cip TEN Inactive Channel Threshold 5 eene 88 Input Analog Baseband Interface B71 settings 60 67 Connector remote 135 Coupling 256 Coupling remote 136 Digital Baseband Interface settings 58 Overload remote siisii nonias 135 EE I E 56 Settings oer EE 55 72 Source Configuration softkey sees OO Source Radio frequency RF ssssssss 55 Input sample rate ISR Digital IQ ise cte O inta 58 Input sources Analog Baseband sss 60 68 Digital IQ pcenis teet ede ep tts 58 Installatiorcoe t retis cob tage eben tia ce ko eid ed res 9 ndo TE 84 IQ offset Eliminating 2 3 cn teinte 110 178 K Keys MAR e na nier ttti ee aden eee e Ee Ero 116 Peak Search eiie tate erret E e ees 117 RUN CONT 5 2 nec ec E 93
136. c value gt Range 0 to 127 Increment 1 RST 0 Example CDP SCOD 28 Sets scrambling code 28 Manual operation See Scrambling Code on page 85 SENSe CDPower STSLot lt State gt This command selects the phase reference for synchronization see Sync To on page 86 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameters State ON OFF ON The instrument synchronizes to the midamble of the selected slot OFF BTS application The instrument synchronizes to the P CCPCH in slot 0 UE application The instrument synchronizes to the channel of the selected slot RST OFF Example CDP SLOT 7 Selects slot number 7 CDP STSL ON Activates synchronizing to the midamble of slot 7 Manual operation See Sync To on page 86 SENSe CDPower STSLot MODE Mode This command selects the phase reference for synchronization see Sync To on page 86 Parameters Mode CODE MA CODE BTS application The instrument synchronizes to the P CCPCH in slot 0 UE application The instrument synchronizes to the channel of the selected slot MA The instrument synchronizes to the midamble of the selected slot RST MA Example CDP STSL MODE CODE Activates channel synchronizing Mode UE only Manual operation See Sync To on page 86 Configuring Code Domain Analysis SENSe CDPower STSLot ROTate Mode By default the TD SCDMA application determi
137. chronization the selected slot must contain at least one data channel with sufficient power Not available for Power vs Time measurements P CCPCH BTS application only By default the R amp S FSW TD SCDMA BTS application determines the phase reference for all downlink data slots from the downlink pilot channel P CCPCH in slot 0 For some measurements like beam forming or repeater measurements it might be necessary to apply dif ferent phase offsets to each time slot In these timeslots using the P CCPCH as phase reference leads to rotated constellation diagrams and poor EVM results Code Chan UE application only nel The R amp S FSW TD SCDMA UE determines the phase reference from the channel of the selected slot This is useful when synchronization fails in poor SNR environments For channel synchronization at least one of the channels must be QPSK or 8PSK modulated Code Domain Analysis Midamble The R amp S FSW TD SCDMA application determines the phase refer ence from the midamble of the selected slot With this method the data slots can be phase rotated to each other and a degradation of the EVM results can be avoided Remote command SENSe CDPower STSLot on page 165 UE application SENSe CDPower STSLot MODE on page 166 Rotate code channel to associated midamble Not available for Power vs Time measurements By default the R amp S FSWTD SCDMA application determines one phase reference for all m
138. ctivating snieni Activating Deactivating remote Z Zooming Activating remote acri tion ets Area Multiple mode remote E Area remote ca oett ee deep Deactivaling 3 rere teneret Multiple mode Multiple mode remote REMOTE sieve eet Restoring original display Single mode Single mode remote sess
139. d by code and spreading factor Remote command CONFigure CDPower CTABle DATA on page 172 Symbol Rate Symbol rate at which the channel is transmitted 6 2 9 Code Domain Analysis Read only for reference purposes For an overview of possible symbol rates depending on the modulation type and other parameters see table 4 8 Modulation The modulation type For an overview of possible modulation types and other parameters see table 4 8 Midamble Shift For channels this is the shift of the associated midamble if a common or default mid amble assignment is detected For details see chapter 4 4 Data Fields and Midambles on page 45 Remote command CONFigure CDPower CTABle MSHift on page 173 State Indicates the channel state Codes that are not assigned are marked as inactive chan nels OFF Remote command CONFigure CDPower CTABle DATA on page 172 Domain Conflict Indicates a code domain conflict between channel definitions e g overlapping chan nels or conflicting channel codes Sweep Settings The sweep settings define how the data is measured Continuous Sweep RUN CONT cccccceeeeneee eens eeeeeeee scans eeeaaeeeeeeeeeeaaeesseneeesiaaeeneeeeees 93 Single Sweep RUN SINGEE et tent i ieee ete ete tdt et e ede 94 Continue Single SW66p 2 2 Reiten Fiir LE EHE a te itera teases 94 ig ee 94 Sweep Average COLD omo tee to ettet ten tanen tn etfi b ddr 94 Continuous Sweep RUN
140. d returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY ADD 1 LEFT MTAB Result y 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only Configuring the Result Display Manual operation See Bitstream on page 16 See Channel Table on page 17 See Code Domain Power on page 18 See Code Domain Error Power on page 19 See Composite Constellation on page 20 See Composite EVM on page 21 See Mag Error vs Chip on page 22 See Marker Table on page 23 See Peak Code Domain Error on page 23 See Phase Error vs Chip on page 24 See Power vs Slot on page 25 See Power vs Symbol on page 26 See Result Summary on page 27 See Symbol Constellation on page 27 See Symbol EVM on page 28 See Symbol Magnitude Error on page 29 See Symbol Phase Error on page 29 See Diagram on page 37 See List Evaluation on page 38 See Result Summary on page 38 See Marker Peak List on page 39 Table 10 2 WindowType parameter values for TD SCDMA application Parameter value Window type BITStream Bitstream CCONst Composite Constellation CDPower Code Domain Power CDEPower Code Domain Error Power CEVM Composite EVM CTABle Channel Table LEValuation List evaluation Power vs Time MECHip Magnitude Error vs Chip MTABle Marker table PCDerror Peak Code Domain Error PECHip Phase Error vs Chip PSLot Channel Po
141. d select the TD SCDMA BTS applications for base sta tion tests or TD SCDMA UE for user equipment tests Code Domain Analysis of the input signal is performed by default 2 Switch to the Power vs Time measurement a Press the MEAS key b In the Select Measurement dialog box select the Power vs Time button 3 For downlink measurements BTS application only Select the Switching Point softkey to define the slot which separates the uplink from the downlink data Only the slots for downlink data are measured and checked against the transmission power mask For uplink measurements the application always measures slot 1 thus the switch ing point is irrelevant 4 For downlink measurements BTS application Select the Auto Level amp Time softkey to adjust the reference level and the trigger offset to subframe start to their optimum levels for the current signal For uplink measurements select the Adapt to Signal softkey and then the Auto Level amp Time button to adjust the reference level and the trigger offset to subframe start automatically 5 Select the No of Subframes softkey to define how many slots are taken into con sideration for the Power vs Time results 6 Optionally press the TRIGGER key and define a trigger for the measurement for example an external trigger to start measuring only when a useful signal is trans mitted 7 Select the Start Meas softkey or press the RUN SINGLE key to start
142. dBm Freq 1 0GHz Channel 1 16 Code Power Att 10dB Slot Oof6 SymbRate 1 1 Code Domain Power 1 Cirw er vs Symbol r Int Anja I Anal S Interval 1 181 ms 1 896 E Analysis Intervs Code 1 code Code b6rSymb 0 2 Symbol EVM For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 47 Import Export Functions 5 1 Q Data Import and Export Baseband signals mostly occur as so called complex baseband signals i e a signal representation that consists of two channels the in phase lI and the quadrature Q channel Such signals are referred to as l Q signals I Q signals are useful because the specific RF or IF frequencies are not needed The complete modulation information and even distortion that originates from the RF IF or baseband domains can be ana lyzed in the I Q baseband Importing and exporting I Q signals is useful for various applications e Generating and saving I Q signals in an RF or baseband signal generator or in external software tools to analyze them with the R amp S FSW later e Capturing and saving I Q signals with an RF or baseband signal analyzer to ana lyze them with the R amp S FSW or an external software tool later As opposed to storing trace data which may be averaged or restricted to peak values l Q data is stored as it was captured without further processing The data is stored as complex values in 32 bit floating point format Multi channel data is
143. defines whether or not the analysis line is displayed in all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master lt n gt is irrelevant Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe VALue lt Position gt This command defines the position of the analysis line for all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Position gt Position of the analysis line in seconds The position must lie within the measurement time of the MSRA measurement Default unit s CALCulate lt n gt MSRA WINDow lt n gt IVAL This command queries the analysis interval for the window specified by the WINDow suffix lt n gt the CALC suffix is irrelevant This command is only available in application measurement channels not the MSRA View or MSRA Master Return values lt IntStart gt Start value of the analysis interval in seconds Default unit s lt IntStop gt Stop value of the analysis interval in seconds Usage Query only INITiate lt n gt REFResh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only for applications in MSRA mode not the MSRA Master The data in the cap
144. detection is based on a power threshold see chapter 4 3 Channels and Codes on page 42 it is important that all codes have a similar power level no more than 1 5 dB difference to the average power in the slot Thus the scaling of the code domain power is relative to the average power of the data parts in the specified slot in the total signal by default The x axis shows the possible codes from 0 to the highest spreading factor Due to the circumstance that the power is regulated from slot to slot the result power may differ between different slots R amp S FSW K76 K77 Measurements and Result Display TE EEE 1 Code Domain Power 1 Code The codes are displayed using the following colors e yellow detected channels red selected channel if a channel is made up of more than one code all codes that belong to the channel are red green no channel detected Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CDPower See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 183 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES CDP see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion CDPower RESult on page 197 TRACe n DATA on page 201 Code Domain Error Power The Code Domain Error Power is the difference in power between the measured and an ideally generated reference signal The number of codes corresponds to the spreading factor The y axis shows the error power for each code Since it is an error power as opposed to the measured power both active and inactive channels can be
145. ding factor see table 4 2 Maximum value of the EVM Average value of the EVM Frequency Error in Hz 1 Q Imbalance in 96 1 Q Offset in 96 Composite EVM in 96 0 38400 Midamble shift of the channel dB Power offset between sum power of channels belonging to midamble k only data field 1 2 and power of midamble k Modulation type of the channel 0 invalid for midamble 1 QPSK 2 8PSK 3 16QAM 4 64QAM Peak Code Domain Error in dB Power of the data parts over all channels in dB Mean power of both data parts P1 and P2 over all channels in dBm Power of the midamble in dB Placeholder value Currently not used 01 Rho 1 16 Spreading Factor of the channel Slot lt SYMRate gt lt TrigFrame gt lt Validity gt Example Usage Manual operation Retrieving Results Slot number The range depends on the capture length Symbol rate in kbps Trigger to Frame in ms This value is valid only after successful synchronization to the TD SCDMA signal When using the Free Run trigger mode the command returns a 9 0 inactive channel 1 active channel 2 alias channel In this case the channel consists of more than one code TRAC2 DATA TRACE1 Returns the trace data from trace 1 in window 2 Query only See Bitstream on page 16 See Channel Table on page 17 See Code Domain Power on page 18 See Code Domain Error Power on page 19 See Compos
146. dio Frequency Input The default input source for the R amp S FSW is Radio Frequency i e the signal at the RF INPUT connector of the R amp S FSW If no additional options are installed this is the only available input source Input L4 I Input Source Power Sensor External Generator Probes Radio Frequency External Input Coupling Mixer Impedance Digital I gradio Direct Path Analog High Pass Filter 1 to 3 GHZ Baseband YIG Preselector Input Connector Baseband Input I Radio Frequency Stele ier tei md N O 56 Input Coupling EE 56 ngerztocipe eina E Aa n E ENa aaa EY 56 Direct Poias a aa a aa a a r OT 56 Code Domain Analysis Figli ass Filiam 1 OTA Zitat e ene ente n re dre eet eren qeet 57 VIG EP TESO no ER 57 BUT CONNEC COR MP 57 Radio Frequency State Activates input from the RF INPUT connector Remote command INPut SELect on page 138 Input Coupling The RF input of the R amp S FSW can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct cur rent DC This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface or from the optional Analog Baseband Interface AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from
147. display in the active measurement channel Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Example LAY REM 2 Removes the result display in the window named 2 Configuring the Result Display Usage Event LAYout REPLace WINDow lt WindowName gt lt WindowType gt This command replaces the window type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already existing window in the active measurement channel while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout ADD WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows in the active measurement channel use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt WindowType gt Type of result display you want to use in the existing window See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 183 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY REPL WIND 1 MTAB Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table LAYout SPLitter lt Index1 gt lt Index2 gt lt Position gt This command changes the position of a splitter and thus controls the size of the win dows on each side of the splitter Compared to the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE on page 182 command the LAYout SPLitter changes the size o
148. e sesssss 66 Connected instr ment 5 aa 67 Input settings Input status remote ee 139 Output connection status remote 142 Outp ut settihgs us coa aed i mitem ente tc e 65 66 Digital 1 Q Connection information sse 67 Enhanced mode 7 Input connection information eessesss 59 InipiESettinigS rians eio teret Deseo x needed Output settings 2 Output settings information eeesessss 66 TOJE hor eenaa Dre ete Rer Eun eR roD riers 79 Digital input Connection information sesin iesise iniiai 59 Digital output Enabling emisias eset toi mas tate tco n rr n eade 66 Direct path lriput configuration acit re terns 56 Ix oaee a N 136 Display Config soll e 13 50 Duplicating Measurement channel remote 130 DwPTS srt M c MM Results Time reference E Electronic input attenuation nitet te 72 Eliminating I QOS ts acsi cic rani oret ote Aa 110 178 Enhanced mode Digital I O romena asn o ettet E teet en ipea 80 Errors o MD 70 74 Evaluation methods REMOTE e 183 Evaluation range Channel tte er n bea per enar 108 REMOTE control iae cert eter rote cineres 176 Settings Slot Softkey Evaluations CIDA
149. e 111 Show UpP TS Results UE mmptde tiet tr tret remet et tette 111 Compensate IQ Offset If enabled the I Q offset is eliminated from the measured signal This is useful to deduct a DC offset to the baseband caused by the DUT thus improving the EVM Note however that for EVM measurements according to standard compensation must be disabled Remote command SENSe CDPower NORMalize on page 178 Code Power Display For Code Domain Power evaluation Defines whether the absolute power or the power relative to the total power of the data parts of the signal is displayed Remote command SENSe CDPower PDISplay on page 178 Channel Table Sort Order You can sort channels in the Channel Table result display in two ways Code Order First all midambles are listed then all control channels and last all data channels The midambles are sorted according to their midamble shifts Active and inactive channels are projected to a spreading factor of 16 and Sorted according to their code numbers T 3 Traces Midamble All control and data channels are assigned to the midambles they Order belong to the midambles are in ascending order The TD SCDMA application automatically distinguishes between common and default midamble allocation If neither a common nor a default midamble allocation is found sorting is in code order The allocation of code to midamble is specified in the TD SCDMA standard See also chapter 4 4 D
150. e 42 Basics Selected Complementary cumulative distribution function see CODE tempe rrt tee reges 36 Composite Constellation Eval atiofi 3 tct Rn 20 Trace results 206 Composite EVM 5 neret treten rit rero 14 Eval atiofy eet rae ita eri ra E 21 Programming example 234 Trace resulls 2 eet ern nets 206 Conflict Channel table retener enden 93 Continue single sweep lec 94 Continuous sweep enc eia 93 Conventions SCOPI comrmands n oreet rents 125 Copying Measurement channel remote 130 Coupling Input remote o ei repe tes 136 D Data acquisition MSRA icto tne tbe dti a qus 83 84 163 see Signal captuting retten tme 83 Data fields BASICS co dete rae idi ER eben i eani a veredas 45 Dra 45 Data format RREMOUG oua rae eec es tore Piae E 200 DC offset Analog Baseband B71 remote control 145 SEC OOS CE 110 Delta markers DENN ciue entier trea Pe netta emi ra tacui etu 114 Diagram footer information eene nnne 11 Diagrams Evaluation method mc mnt t es 37 Footer information ucro tuer hama pets rette nnde 11 Differential input Analog Baseband B71 remote control 143 Analog Baseband B71 n se 61 68 DiglConf see also RES DiglGonf iot nn 59 Digital Baseband Interfac
151. e Spectrum application except for some special marker functions and spectrograms which are not available in TD SCDMA applications For details see the Common Analysis and Display Functions chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 10 10 Analysis on page 213 Evalsation Pale oerte REM hx ee RYE ATE oS ERR APER SENE REN ER aa Eaa 108 e Code Domain Analysis Settings ssssssssssssssse eene 109 icc RT 111 LER uc cc 112 7 1 Evaluation Range The evaluation range defines which channel slot or set is evaluated in the result dis play Channel Code Number Slot Number Set To Analyze Channel Gode NBImDOGl tto rote t entere std e t re te ea 108 lem D 109 low E E 109 Channel Code Number Selects a channel for the following evaluations e Bitstream Power vs Slot Power vs Symbol Result Summary Symbol Constellation Code Domain Analysis Settings e Symbol EVM Enter a code number and spreading factor separated by a decimal point The specified channel is selected and marked in red in the corresponding result dis plays if active If no spreading factor is specified the code on the basis of the spread ing factor 16 is marked For unused channels the code resulting from the conversion is marked Example Enter 4 8 Channel 4 is marked at spreading factor 8 35 2 ksps if
152. e a name and optionally a comment that describes the channel table The comment is displayed when you set the focus on the table in the Predefined Tables list 4 Define the maximum number of users MA Shifts Cell to be used for the channel table 5 Define the channels to be detected using one of the following methods Select the Measure Table button to create a table that consists of the channels detected in the currently measured signal Or a Select the Add Channel button to insert a row for a new channel below the currently selected row in the channel table b Define the channel specifications required for detection 6 Select the Save Table button to store the channel table The table is stored and the dialog box is closed The new channel table is included in the Predefined Tables list in the Channel Detection dialog box User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 120 T To activate the use of the new channel table a Select the table in the Predefined Tables list b Select the Select button A checkmark is displayed next to the selected table c Toggle the Use Predefined Channel Table setting to Predefined d Close the dialog box e Start a new measurement To perform a Power vs Time check The Power vs Time measurement checks the signal power in the time domain against a transmission power mask defined by the TD SCDMA specification for details see Power vs Time on page 31 1 Press the MODE key an
153. e channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 131 lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the name of the new channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 131 Example INST CRE REPL IQAnalyzer2 IQ IQAnalyzer Replaces the channel named IQAnalyzer2 by a new measure ment channel of type IQ Analyzer named IQAnalyzer Usage Setting only INSTrument DELete lt ChannelName gt This command deletes a measurement channel If you delete the last measurement channel the default Spectrum channel is activa ted Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel you want to delete A measurement channel must exist in order to be able delete it Example INST DEL IQAnalyzer4 Deletes the channel with the name IQAnalyzer4 Usage Event INSTrument LIST This command queries all active measurement channels This is useful in order to obtain the names of the existing measurement channels which are required in order to replace or delete the channels Return values lt ChannelType gt For each channel the command returns the channel type and lt ChannelName gt channel name see tables below Tip to change the channel name use the INSTrument REName command Example INST LIST Result for 3 measurement channels ADEM Analog Demod IQ IQ
154. e e hmm eqs 172 CONFigure CDPower CTABle MSHift cccccceeeceeee cece eaeeeeae ae aaa sees enne nennen nnne 173 CONFigure CDPower CTABle COMMent lt Comment gt This command defines a comment for the channel table selected with CONFigure CDPower CTABle NAME Parameters lt Comment gt comment for the channel table Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME CTAB 1 Selects channel table CTAB 1 CONF CDP CTAB COMM Comment for CTAB 1 Writes a comment for CTAB 1 Manual operation See Comment on page 90 CONFigure CDPower CTABle NAME lt ChannelTable gt This command selects an existing channel table or creates a new one Use this com mand to edit the channel table To use a channel table for a measurement use the CONFigure CDPower CTABle SELect command Parameters lt ChannelTable gt lt string gt name of the channel table RST RECENT Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Selects channel table for editing If a channel table with this name does not exist a new channel table by that name is cre ated Manual operation See Name on page 90 Configuring Code Domain Analysis CONFigure CDPower CTABle DATA lt ChannelType gt lt CodeClass gt lt CodeNumber gt lt ModType gt lt MAShift gt lt ActiveFlag gt lt Reserved gt lt Reserved gt This command defines or queries the parameters of the channel table selected or cre ated with the CONFigure CDPower CTABle NAME command
155. e enne nnn 75 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display OVLD for analog baseband or digitial baseband input The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the hardware of the R amp S FSW is adapted according to this value it is recom mended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 152 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level The scal ing of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Note however that the internal reference level used to adjust the hardware settings to the expected signal optimally ignores any Reference Level Offset Thus it is impor tant to keep in mind the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle and not to rely on the displayed reference level internal ref
156. e frequency is below that value Remote command INPut FILTer YIG STATe on page 137 Input Connector Determines whether the RF input data is taken from the RF INPUT connector default or the optional BASEBAND INPUT I connector This setting is only available if the optional Analog Baseband Interface is installed and active for input It is not available for the R amp S FSW67 or R amp S FSW85 For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and l Q Input User Manual Remote command INPut CONNector on page 135 Code Domain Analysis Digital I Q Input Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the optional Digi tal Baseband Interface in the applications that support it These settings are only available if the Digital Baseband Interface option is installed on the R amp S FSW They can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box Input Source Power Sensor Frequency Digital IQ Input Sample Rate 10 0 MHz Auto Wanuar Ad c Level IQR 100 101165 Digital 1Q OUT Sample Rate 10 MHz Full Scale Level 10 dBm For more information see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and l Q Input User Manual Digital VQ IMput States rares petendam ret te eeepc the 58 Input Sample Salis recenti ette dete redet eu ub Leserreisen a erdt a deed 58 Pull Scale Level EE 59 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level
157. e input signal can be configured via the Frequency dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Select the FREQ key and then the Frequency Config softkey Select Input Frontend from the Overview and then switch to the Frequency tab Frequency Center 13 25 GHz Stepsize Value Frequency Offset Value 0 0 Hz Conter TREGUOI a ERRi 76 Contor Frequency SISpSIZQ ocres dr iocur cc oer buxc nde en eee 77 FReQUeNCY OSCL E P u lele 77 Center frequency Defines the normal center frequency of the signal The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span Code Domain Analysis span gt 0 SPAN pin 2 s foenter E fmax SPAN pin 2 fmax and span i depend on the instrument and are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 149 Center Frequency Stepsize Defines the step size by which the center frequency is increased or decreased using the arrow keys When you use the rotary knob the center frequency changes in steps of only 1 10 of the Center Frequency Stepsize The step size can be coupled to another value or it can be manually set to a fixed value This setting is available for frequency and time domain measurements Center Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency The used value is indicated in the Value field Manual Define
158. e keys on the instrument or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard operating procedures The term select may refer to any of the described methods i e using a finger on the touchscreen a mouse pointer in the display or a key on the instrument or on a key board 1 3 3 Notes on Screenshots When describing the functions of the product we use sample screenshots These screenshots are meant to illustrate as much as possible of the provided functions and possible interdependencies between parameters The screenshots usually show a fully equipped product that is with all options instal led Thus some functions shown in the screenshots may not be available in your par ticular product configuration Starting the TD SCDMA Application 2 Welcome to the TD SCDMA Applications The TD SCDMA applications add functionality to the R amp S FSW to perform code domain analysis or power measurements according to the TD SCDMA standard R amp S FSW K76 performs Base Transceiver Station BTS measurements for downlink signals R amp S FSW K77 performs User Equipment UE measurements for uplink signals In particular the TD SCDMA applications feature Code domain analysis providing results like code domain power EVM peak code domain error etc Various power measurements e Spectrum Emission Mask measurements e Statistical CCDF evaluation This user manual contains a description of the function
159. e of a particular display window indicated by the lt n gt suffix in the active measurement channel Note to query the index of a particular window use the LAYout IDENtifyl WINDow command Return values lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window In the default state the name of the window is its index Example LAY WIND2 IDEN Queries the name of the result display in window 2 Response 2 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow n REMove This command removes the window specified by the suffix n from the display in the active measurement channel R amp S FSW K76 K77 Remote Commands for TD SCDMA Measurements SSE eae 10 7 3 10 7 3 1 The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REMove WINDow command Example LAY WIND2 REM Removes the result display in window 2 Usage Event LAY out WINDow lt n gt REPLace lt WindowType gt This command changes the window type of an existing window specified by the suffix lt n gt in the active measurement channel The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REPLace WINDow com mand To add a new window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD command Parameters lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to replace another one with See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 183 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY WIND2 REPL MTAB Replaces the result display in window 2
160. e previous one Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves each trace point in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one Average The average is formed over several measurements View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Blank Removes the selected trace from the display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 213 Markers Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram Thus you can extract numeric values from a graphical display Markers are configured in the Marker dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker tab Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey Markers in Code Domain Analysis measurements In Code Domain Analysis measurements the markers are set to individual symbols codes slots or channels depending on the result display Thus you can use the mark ers to identify individual codes for example Individual Marker SQA GS sissenceieigsnnscesedeasaceeextuscceecipuencceeueeaeteaea stance clbiene 113 e General Marker Settings eene entrent nennen 114 e Marker Search Sellings ds redet ie dri ce dd cua o E C d gud 115 Marker Positioning FUHIGUOls corio eere rera en a e Ee exi
161. e specified input connector meets or exceeds the specified trigger level See Trigger Level on page 80 Note The External Trigger 1 softkey automatically selects the trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector on the front panel For details see the Instrument Tour chapter in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual External Trigger 1 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 1 INPUT connector External Trigger 2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 2 INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 64 External Trigger 3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 64 Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT2 TRIG SOUR EXT3 See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 159 Digital I Q Trigger Source Trigger Source For applications that process I Q data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applica tions and only if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is available Defines triggering of the measurement directly via the LVDS connector In the selection list you must specify which general purpose bit GPO to GP5 will provide the trigger data Note Code Domain Analysis If the Digital I Q enhanced mode is used i e the connected device supports transfer rates up to 200 Msps o
162. eFormatVersion Format that contains the number of the file format definition Currently fileFormatVersion 2 is used Name Optional describes the device or application that created the file Comment Optional contains text that further describes the contents of the file DateTime Contains the date and time of the creation of the file Its type is xs dateTime see RsIqTar xsd Samples Contains the number of samples of the I Q data For multi channel signals all chan nels have the same number of samples One sample can be e A complex number represented as a pair of and Q values Acomplex number represented as a pair of magnitude and phase values e Areal number represented as a single real value See also Format element Clock Contains the clock frequency in Hz i e the sample rate of the I Q data A signal gen erator typically outputs the I Q data at a rate that equals the clock frequency If the I Q data was captured with a signal analyzer the signal analyzer used the clock fre quency as the sample rate The attribute unit must be set to Hz Format Specifies how the binary data is saved in the I Q data binary file see DataFilename element Every sample must be in the same format The format can be one of the following e complex Complex number in cartesian format i e and Q values interleaved and Q are unitless e real Real number unitless polar Complex number in polar format i e magnitude un
163. eSize gt lt FileName gt lt FileSize gt Parameters lt TotalSize gt Sum of file sizes of all channel table files in bytes lt FreeMem gt Available memory left on hard disk in bytes lt FileName gt File name of individual channel table file lt FileSize gt File size of individual channel table file in bytes Example CONF CDP CTAB CAT Returns all existing channel tables Usage Query only Manual operation See Predefined Tables on page 89 Configuring Code Domain Analysis CONFigure CDPower CTABle COPY lt TargetFileName gt This command copies one channel table to another Select the channel table you want to copy using the CONFigure CDPower CTABle NAME command The name of the channel table may contain up to eight characters Parameters lt TargetFileName gt lt string gt name of the new channel table Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME CTAB 1 Selects channel table CTAB 1 CONF CDP CTAB COPY CTAB 2 Makes a copy of CTAB 1 with the name CTAB 2 Manual operation See Copying a Table on page 90 CONFigure CDPower CTABle DELete This command deletes the selected channel table Select the channel table you want to delete using the CONFigure CDPower CTABle NAME command Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME CTAB 1 Selects channel table CTAB 1 CONF CDP CTAB DEL Deletes channel table CTAB 1 Usage Event Manual operation See Deleting a Table on page 90 CONFigure CDPower CT
164. easurements with the optional Digital Baseband Interface Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC AC coupling DC DC coupling RST AC Example INP COUP DC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Coupling on page 56 INPut DPATh lt State gt Enables or disables the use of the direct path for frequencies close to 0 Hz Parameters lt State gt AUTO 1 Default the direct path is used automatically for frequencies close to 0 Hz OFF 0 The analog mixer path is always used RST 1 Example INP DPAT OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Direct Path on page 56 INPut FILTer HPASs STATe lt State gt Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the R amp S FSW in order to mea sure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires an additional high pass filter hardware option Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP FILT HPAS ON Turns on the filter Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz on page 57 INPut FILTer YIG STATe State This command turns the YIG preselector on and off Note the
165. ed bits are referred to as chips Each slot consists of 864 chips The chips are transferred at a rate of 1 28 Megachips per second Mcps Active and inactive codes slots During code domain analysis the power in the selected slot in the captured subframes is measured in order to detect active channels If the total power in the slot does not exceed a threshold the slot is considered to be inactive Otherwise the slot is ana lyzed to detect channels To do so the data in the slot is unscrambled according to the defined scrambling code and carrier center frequency Then all possible spreading sequences are applied to the unscrambled data defining the individual channels Each despread channel whose power exceeds the channel threshold is considered to be active The reference signal is then generated according to the active channels only If the power threshold for inactive channels is not set correctly power from supposedly inactive channels contributes to the peak code domain error leading to false results In order to determine the correct threshold the Code Domain Power evaluation is a useful instrument see Code Domain Power on page 18 4 3 1 Special Channels In order to control the data transmission between the sender and the receiver specific symbols must be included in the transmitted data This data is included in special data channels defined by the 3GPP standard which use fixed codes in the code domain Thus t
166. ed by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Code Domain Analysis Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe IMMediate on page 162 6 2 5 Signal Capture Data Acquisition How much and how data is captured from the input signal are defined in the Signal Capture settings i Common Settings Sample Rate 2 MHz Invert Q RRC Filter Capture Settings Number of Slots Set Count Set to Analyze MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master channel actually captures data from the input signal The data acquisition settings for the TD SCDMA BTS application in MSRA mode define the application data extract See chapter 6 2 6 Application Data MSRA on page 84 For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual Sample ROG see P 83 hi9 n 84 RRC acu 84 SO QUI a 84 SE MOAB DTE 84 Number of Slotsto Capu eao a tu ede tace doa ecce etr td ainda ante 84 Sample Rate The sample rate is always 2 MHz indicated for reference only 6 2 6 Code Domain Analysis Invert Q Inverts the sign of the signal s Q branch The default setting is OFF Remote command SENSe
167. eeeeeeeeeeseneeeeseieeeeeees CALCulate n DELTamarker m MlINimum RIGHE eeeesessesessissssesesee seinen nennen nnne nnne CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK essent GALCulatesn2z DEETamarkersetiEs X ccce sete erus m eoa REEE EES AE EE TAATA E EEEE 216 CALCulate lt n gt DEL l amarkeremo X RELaftive 1 cernis c rt cric ede tpu gei Ce aes 216 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y CALCulat n gt DEL Tamarkersm gt STATE sos aio centro p erai toan tH gere terse ehh errata koe voa erre eges e Veris reidzizipe T e Ee ripe 210 CALCulate n MARKer FUNCtion CDPower RESUIt essent nnne 197 CALGCulatesn MARKer me AQOEFE ccpit ect rr pe tte apte vete e ep recte Der tp ge e eds CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum NENXT retium utn eiad ieia GALCulate sn MARKer m MAXimu m RIGEIL oriri etae ee eren eee Lan ket ecce apa Dea s E cdd CALCulatexn MARKer m MAXimumy PEAK innuere taa rnnt rnnt rnnt theatri rne oa an CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimUMILEF T xit otros tte adenine CALCulatesn MARKer m MINim rm NEXT aacra rere p cort cetur een tbe E EUR ga A CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum RIGHIE
168. eeeseaneees 220 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 117 Analysis CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 117 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher minimum value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 117 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet ac
169. efines the reference level for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Level on page 70 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Offset This command defines a reference level offset for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Offset gt Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST OdB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Configuring Code Domain Analysis Manual operation See Shifting the Display Offset on page 71 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition Position This command defines the vertical position of the reference level on the display grid for all traces t is irrelevant The R amp S FSW adjusts the scaling of the y axis accordingly Parameters Position 0 PCT corresponds to the lower display border 100 corre sponds to the upper display border RST 100 PCT frequency display 50 PCT time dis play Example DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT Usage SCPI confirmed DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue Value The command defines the power value assigned to the reference position in the grid for all traces t is irrelevant For external generator calibration measurements requires the optional External Gen erator Control this command defines the power offset value assigned to the reference position Parameters Value RS
170. el displayed reference level offset Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 152 Unit Reference Level For CDA measurements the unit should not be changed as this would lead to useless results Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the full scale level are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized To determine the optimal reference level a level measurement is performed on the R amp S FSW You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 96 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 176 RF Attenuation Defines the attenuation applied to the RF input of the R amp S FSW This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S9FSW K76 K77 Configuration Attenuation Mode Value RF Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting By default and when electronic attenuation is not available
171. elected TD SCDMA measurement are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode The selected evaluation also affects the results of the trace data query see chap ter 10 9 3 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt on page 204 ur m M M 16 Chamel Table cioe irrito a eS e ERROR FERNER T S ee RxRM AER ERE 17 L Channel Table Configuration eese scent nina eanna 18 Code Doma POWDER ek e halte etae uei de eg Rn d 18 Code Domain Error POWLE 5 rere toI Pea Eee rera Ene ana ER E PLE Ee OA PN bends 19 Composite Constellation 5 e e a aa aa RES RXREU MARRE ARR AAEE 20 COMPOSE EVM us eee ten i aeree ent detnr tee t a n Re tetuer ren Ras Pa bred 21 Mag Error vS ChP e 22 Marker Table eer REP ARERRN RR ERNSESRRS A RAS REX a MA ER aaa 23 Peak Code Domain Error essssssssssssssssssseseee e enne nnne nenemrtrn sensns nnn ia 23 Phas Emor i4 oe a aa 24 Power VS SIOG M 25 Power VS SYML PER 26 FRESE SEDIS iir cou trr c rtt ere O c Pt e hee dec E LE de 27 SY MbOl Cornstellat otri 2 ritardo teer tees rivedere Ronan ped edad 27 Symbol EVIL ien eei e bass EXER a ERNFERT M NEANY 28 Symbol Magnitude EOT e 29 yimbpblP tese ENOT aei rtt tore ce dere rot a ie oe td vena tr a Ale adire d 29 Bitstream
172. ency 232 Relative code domain power 232 SEM 4 ees 230 Signal channel power 229 TD SCDMA 228 Triggered ODP rrt rre t tert tee 234 Protection RF inputi remote inseminatie 135 R R amp S DiglGOhf 5 eec tice aie dices sands s 59 R amp S EX IQ BOX DIGIGONT into EE 59 Range iem T 76 RCDE Average ssent esee eaa pochi es imum on POSEEN 14 Reference frequency Programming example enean erras 232 Reference level cac cea seien tesa ko saca cena aer Ri ses 70 74 AUTO 1 o savers eavasealaved denser ect cavaciagets 71 74 95 Digital 1 Q DIEM EU 11 WTS ERE Unit 3 MalUgzimieecukiebuteeee Duet Pede dex exe oues Axe ada re ORAE Reference POWE ecco ie tht OSEE Ie enti bred rot bead 110 Refreshing MSRA appliCatloris nocet toit eerte 94 MSRA applications remote sess 223 MSRT applications remote c M Remote commands Basics on syntax Boolean vallis ie et eite etes Capitalization menean nas et ren oe etes ri ee non Character data T Data blocks onore ende ENDENE N meric Values rents tree itte dde deep Obsolete E Optional KeywOFdS inia t eti oat peret 126 Parameters eee sete ter pe Re 127 Strings E SUFIXES iesea mm 126 Resetting RF input POLE CHOM isian an nina 135 Restoring Channel settings iota ciet 54 100 Result display Gonflg latiOn uctor toe rette rhe ene to re
173. er on page 196 A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Note In order to synchronize to the end of a sequential measurement using OPC OPC or WAI you must use SING1e Sequence mode Starting a Measurement For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Mode SINGIe Each measurement is performed once regardless of the chan nel s sweep mode considering each channels sweep count until all measurements in all active channels have been per formed CONTinuous The measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other repeatedly regardless of the channel s sweep mode in the same order until the Sequencer is stopped CDEFined First a single sequence is performed Then only those channels in continuous sweep mode INIT CONT ON are repeated RST CONTinuous Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer REFResh ALL This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only in MSRA or MSRT mode The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by all active MSRA MSRT applications The suffix lt n gt is irrelev
174. er vs time mea surements Only one measurement type can be configured per channel however several chan nels with TD SCDMA applications can be configured in parallel on the R amp S FSW Thus you can configure one channel for a Code Domain Analysis for example and another for a Time Alignment Error or Power measurement for the same input signal Then you can use the Sequencer to perform all measurements consecutively and Switch through the results easily or monitor all results at the same time in the Multi View tab For details on the Sequencer function see the R amp S FSW User Manual Selecting the measurement type When you activate an TD SCDMA application Code Domain Analysis of the input sig nal is started automatically However the TD SCDMA applications also provide other measurement types gt To select a different measurement type do one of the following e Select the Overview softkey In the Overview select the Select Measure ment button Select the required measurement e Press the MEAS key In the Select Measurement dialog box select the required measurement e Result Display ConfIgU lation oi iniit et iru bo Ep donne rp voee Eo eed Rie ipea 50 Code Domain AbSlysls 222 O ctu n Rede Ru aai ED une 51 e Frequency and Time Domain Measurements sse 98 6 1 Result Display Configuration The captured signal can be displayed using various evaluation methods All evaluation met
175. ere INPut COUPling on page 136 INPut IMPedance on page 137 SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 176 Remote commands exclusive to amplitude settings DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO ONCE ccecceeeeecaeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeneneees 151 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MAXimum eeeseseeeeeneneneneenenne 151 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MINimum eeeeeeeeeeee enne 152 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe PDlVision eeeeseseneeeeeee een 152 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel esseseseee eene 152 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet eeesessssessss 152 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition seen 153 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe st Y SCALe RVALue esses 153 INPUTEGAINGS TA c ENE 153 INPutGAINEVALuel 1 oio derer eterna ipe rx tae enge tate exe urea exea Eau dde 154 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE Automatic scaling of the y axis is performed once then switched off again for all traces t is irrelevant Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Auto Scale Once on page 76 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXimum Value This command defines the maximum value of the y axis for all traces in the selected result display The su
176. erence level displayed reference level offset Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 152 Unit Reference Level For CDA measurements the unit should not be changed as this would lead to useless results Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the full scale level are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized To determine the optimal reference level a level measurement is performed on the R amp S FSW Code Domain Analysis You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 96 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 176 Full Scale Level Mode Value The full scale level defines the maximum power you can input at the Baseband Input connector without clipping the signal The full scale level can be defined automatically according to the reference level or manually For manual input the following values can be selected e 025V e 05V e 1V e 2V If probes are connected the possible full scale values are adapted according to the probe s attenuation and maximum allowed p
177. erence level is adapted automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer on page 175 Code Domain Analysis 6 2 11 Zoom Functions The zoom functions are only available from the toolbar RNS ZOOIN M 97 Multiple ZOO e 97 Restore Original Display ierra Sae Leere Qe Pao eu Er E eee Ey iii e gU 97 R Deactivating Zoom Selection mode tnter 97 Single Zoom R A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the required details are visible Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 190 DISPlay WINDowcn Z00OM AREA on page 189 Multiple Zoom Ee In multiple zoom mode you can enlarge several different areas of the trace simultane ously An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows The zoom area that corre sponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner between the scrollbars Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z0OM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 191 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA on page 190 Restore Original Display Restores the original display and closes all zoom windows Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M STATe on page 19
178. es are between 0 and 127 and have to be entered as decimals Remote command SENSe CDPower SCODe on page 165 SYNC UL Code UE only Defines the code used for synchronization on the UpPTS see Time Reference UE mode on page 86 Remote command SENSe CDPower SULC on page 167 MA Shift Cell Number of Users Sets the maximum number of usable midamble shifts 2 number of users on the base station Possible values are in the range from 2 to 16 in steps of 2 midamble shifts Code Domain Analysis If you use a predefined channel table this value is replaced by that of the channel table For details see chapter 4 4 Data Fields and Midambles on page 45 Remote command SENSe CDPower MSHift on page 165 Time Reference BTS mode Defines which slot is used as a time reference for synchronization DwPTS Uses the Downlink Pilot Time Slot DwPTS as a time reference see also chapter 4 2 Frames Subframes and Slots on page 40 Slot 0 Uses slot 0 as a time reference Remote command SENSe CDPower TREF on page 167 Time Reference UE mode Defines which slot is used as a time reference for synchronization UpPTS Uses the Uplink Pilot Time Slot UpPTS as a time reference see also chapter 4 2 Frames Subframes and Slots on page 40 Slot 1 Uses slot 1 as a time reference Remote command SENSe CDPower TREF on page 167 Sync To Defines the phase reference For a successful syn
179. es the number of subframes to be used for averaging Parameters numeric value Subframe value RST 100 Example CONF CDP PVT SFR 50 Sets the number of subframes to 50 Manual operation See No of Subframes on page 101 CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime SPOint numeric value This command defines the switching point between uplink and downlink slots Parameters numeric value 1to7 RST 3 Example CONF CDP PVT SPO 7 Sets the switching point to 7 Manual operation See Switching Point on page 100 SENSe POWer ACHannel AUTO LTIMe This command automatically adjusts the reference level and the trigger to frame time to their optimum levels This prevents overloading of the R amp S FSW Current measurements are aborted when this command is executed and resumed after the automatic level detection is finished Usage Event Manual operation See Auto Level amp Time on page 101 Configuring the Slot Range for Frequency Sweeps on Downlink Data In the BTS application you can define which slots to analyze i e which slots contain downlink data depending on the switching point SENSe POWer ACHannelSLEOT S TARL 22 1 steels eesti eee toe aca c EE SENE deua 181 SENSe POWer ACHannel SLOT STOP ttn sccguatecececanadencneanteceadecetaaennatanness 181 Configuring the Result Display SENSe POWer ACHannel SLOT STARt lt StartSlot gt Sets the first slot of the measurement Parameters
180. et if defined is also considered For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet Remote command TRIG SOUR IFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 159 Trigger Level Trigger Source Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source Code Domain Analysis For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port on page 158 For analog baseband or digital baseband input only TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower on page 158 Trigger Offset Trigger Source Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement offset gt 0 Start of the measurement is delayed offset 0 Measurement starts earlier pre trigger Remote command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 157 Slope Trigger Source For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 159 Hysteresis Trigger Source Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Settting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level This setting is only available for IF Power trigger sources The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a ste
181. eves the calculated channel power value of the reference channel CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CPOW Result 36 013 dBm Queries the result of the limit check CALC LIM FAIL Result 0 passed Retrieves the peak list of the spectrum emission mask measurement TRAC DATA LIST Result 1 000000000 1 275000000E 007 8 500000000E 006 8 057177734E 00 2 000000000 8 500000000E 006 7 500000000E 006 8 158547211E 00 3 000000000 7 500000000E 006 3 500000000E 006 4 202708435E 00 eve 7 7 882799530E 00 7 984169006E 00 4 028330231E 00 2 982799530E 3 084169006E 775 270565033 4 Table 10 8 Trace results for Relative Code Domain Power measurement 000000000E4 006 001 0 000000000 000000000E 006 001 0 000000000 000000000E4 006 0 000000000 0 000000000 0 000000000 08782336E 009 0 000000000 0 00000000 09000064E 009 0 000000000 0 00000000 2 R_ Start Stop RBW Freq Abs Rel Deltato Limit an freq freq Hz peak peak peak margin check ge Hz Hz power power power dB result N Hz dBm o 1 1 00000 1 27500 8 50000 1 00000 2 10878 8 05717 7 88279 2 982 0 0000 0000E 0000E 0000E 2336E 7734E 9530E 79953 0 0 007 006 006 009 001 001 0E 00 00 00 001 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0
182. f all windows to either side of the splitter per manently it does not just maximize a single window temporarily Note that windows must have a certain minimum size If the position you define con flicts with the minimum size of any of the affected windows the command will not work but does not return an error R amp S FSW K76 K77 Remote Commands for TD SCDMA Measurements y 100 x 100 y 100 1 01 GHz 102 12 dim x 0 y 0 x 100 Fig 10 1 SmartGrid coordinates for remote control of the splitters Parameters lt Index1 gt The index of one window the splitter controls Index2 The index of a window on the other side of the splitter Position New vertical or horizontal position of the splitter as a fraction of the screen area without channel and status bar and softkey menu The point of origin x 0 y 0 is in the lower left corner of the screen The end point x 100 y 100 is in the upper right cor ner of the screen See figure 10 1 The direction in which the splitter is moved depends on the screen layout If the windows are positioned horizontally the splitter also moves horizontally If the windows are positioned vertically the splitter also moves vertically Range 0 to 100 Example LAY SPL 1 3 50 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Table to the center 50 of the screen i e in the fig ure above to the left Example LAY SPL 1 4 70 Moves the splitter
183. ffix t is irrelevant Parameters Value numeric value RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Manual operation See Y Maximum Y Minimum on page 76 Configuring Code Domain Analysis DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum Value This command defines the minimum value of the y axis for all traces in the selected result display The suffix t is irrelevant Parameters Value numeric value RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Manual operation See Y Maximum Y Minimum on page 76 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision Value This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible The suffix t is irrelevant Parameters Value numeric value WITHOUT UNIT unit according to the result dis play Defines the range per division total range 10 lt Value gt RST depends on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y PDIV 10 Sets the grid spacing to 10 units e g dB per division DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command d
184. fre quency is not 0 the in phase component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF I Q The quadrature component of the input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center fre quency is not 0 the quadrature component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF Q RST IQ Example INP IQ TYPE Q Manual operation See Q Mode on page 61 CALibration AIQ HATiming STATe State Activates a mode with enhanced timing accuracy between analog baseband RF and external trigger signals For more information see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 ON 1 The high accuracy timing function is switched on The cable for high accuracy timing must be connected to trigger ports 1 and 2 OFF 0 The high accuracy timing function is switched off RST OFF Example CAL AIQ HAT STAT ON Manual operation See High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RF on page 61 10 5 1 4 Setting up Probes Probes can be connected to the optional BASEBAND INPUT connectors if the Analog Baseband interface option R amp S FSW B71 is installed Configuring Code Domain Analysis ISBNSeTPROBSSpS SE lip CMOPISQL 2 1 atre iore cree he ata aa eade n de 146 SENSeJPROBeSsp IDIPARTDHBRIDQE ctae i oe e te EXER RE ERE RH RRREIT Fre aFE Re ETA i 146 SENSe PROBe p ID SRNumber sisse nnne nne netten nnne tenens 14
185. frequency ertOr connerie 14 CCDF Configuration TD SCDMA sse 106 TD SCDMA results CDA nacen Analysis settings Channel results Sn Config riligi 5 0 rn eer rer rrr rre in racio Configuring remote 3 carceris 134 Evaluation settings remote 3 Parameters reete eror E ER e dea Performlikig eniro ttti pene Results GDEP niit Evaluation CDP Evaluation sirieias nonion rere ae 18 Programming example sissit 232 Trace results contrer rni En 206 Center frequery eec erento ore penetrans 76 Analog Baseband B71 62 69 SOfIK6y eic een ntn me err nr e i ee s 76 Step SIZE coi ieri ree n er caes 7T Channel Power measurement Configuration 102 Channel bandwidth MSRA MOJE etre rrr cie eee rei 46 Channel detection Configuring 2 87 Modulation 50 Remote control 168 Search mode nre iein erriari drenan 89 Rienci 87 Channel number 2492 Channel power 2519 ACLR see ACLR je dO Programming example 5 correre einen 229 Channel table Configuration Evaluation x54 SOMONGESR 25 05 nea red eer eto REEE CSERE 110 Channel tables GOMAQUIING MP M 120 Configuring remote Copying te Creating n 89 Creating from input Deleting 90 Details 9
186. gital output simultaneously is not possible If digital baseband output is active the sample rate is restricted to 100 MHz 200 MHz if enhanced mode is possible max 160 MHz bandwidth Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example OUTP DIQ ON Manual operation See Digital Baseband Output on page 66 OUTPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital I Q data output to the optional Digital Baseband Interface Return values lt ConnState gt Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected lt DeviceName gt Device ID of the connected device lt SerialNumber gt Serial number of the connected device lt PortName gt Port name used by the connected device lt NotUsed gt to be ignored lt MaxTransferRate gt Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz lt ConnProtState gt State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the connected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done Configuring Code Domain Analysis PRBSTestState State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt NotUsed gt to be ignored lt Placeholder gt for future use currently 0 Example OUTP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMW200A 101190 CODER 1 IN 0 200000000 Passed Done 0 0 Manual operation See Output Settings Information on page 66 See C
187. gnal The EVM is the root of the ratio of the mean error power to the power of an ideally generated reference signal To calculate the mean error power the root mean square average of the real and imaginary parts of the signal is used The EVM is shown in This evaluation is useful to determine the modulation accuracy 4 Composite EVM 1 Slot Fig 3 5 CompositE EVM display for TD SCDMA BTS measurements The result display shows the composite EVM values per slot The slots are displayed according to the detected channels using the following colors yellow active channel e red selected channel if a channel is made up of more than one code all codes that belong to the channel are red User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 21 Code Domain Analysis none no active channels Only the channels detected as being active are used to generate the ideal reference signal If a channel is not detected as being active e g on account of low power the difference between the test signal and the reference signal and therefore the compo site EVM is very large Distortions also occur if unassigned codes are wrongly given the status of active chan nel To obtain reliable measurement results select an adequate channel threshold Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CEVM See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 183 TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 201 Mag Error vs Chip The Magnitude Error versus chip display shows the magnitude error for all c
188. gnal in percent for the selected channel and the selected slot A trace over all symbols of a slot is drawn The number of symbols depends on the symbol rate or spreading factor of the channel see table 4 8 1 Symbol EVM 5 5 Symb Symb 43 Fig 3 13 Symbol EVM display for TD SCDMA BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SEVM see u on page 183 on page 201 User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 28 R amp S FSW K76 K77 Measurements and Result Display uuu uq un GO EL EEE EEE EEE EEE Ss Symbol Magnitude Error The Symbol Magnitude Error is calculated analogous to symbol EVM The result is one symbol magnitude error value for each symbol of the slot of a special channel Positive values of symbol magnitude error indicate a symbol magnitude that is larger than the expected ideal value negative symbol magnitude errors indicate a symbol magnitude that is less than the ideal one The symbol magnitude error is the difference between the magnitude of the received symbol and that of the reference symbol related to the magnitude of the reference symbol 1 Symbol Magnitude Error Symb 0 2 Symb Symb 19 Fig 3 14 Symbol Magnitude Error display for TD SCDMA BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SMERror see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 183 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 Symbol Phase Error The Symbol Phase Error is calculated analogous to symbol EVM The result
189. h et nn ene enne 228 CALCulate lt n gt FEED Evaluation This command selects the evaluation method of the measured data that is to be dis played in the specified window Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the LAYout commands for new remote control programs see chapter 10 7 2 Working with Win dows in the Display on page 182 Parameters Evaluation Type of evaluation you want to display See the table below for available parameter values Example INST SE Activates CALC F BTDS I EBD CDP TD SCDMA mode Selects the display of the code domain power Table 10 6 Evaluation parameter values for TD SCDMA applications String Parameter Enum Parameter Evaluation XTIM CDP BSTReam BITStream Bitstream XTIM CDP COMP CONStel CCONst Composite Constellation lation XPOW CDEPower CDEPower Code Domain Error Power XPOW CDP CDPower Code Domain Power absolute scaling XPOW CDP ABSolute XPOW CDP RATio CDPower Code Domain Power relative scaling XTIM CDP MACCuracy CEVM Composite EVM XTIM CDP ERR CTABle CTABle Channel Table XTIM CDP ERR PCDomain PCDerror Peak Code Domain Error XTIM CDP PVSLot PSLot Power vs Slot absolute scaling XTIM CDP PVSLot ABSolute XTIM CDP PVSLot RATio PSLot Power vs Slot relative scaling XTIM CDP PVSYmbo PSYMbol Power vs Symbol XTI
190. hannel Detection on page 168 e Retrieving Calculated Measurement ReSults ccccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeenes 197 e Retrieving Trace RSUItS 5 0 ccc cieseccecebersdecseceeeanececnaneetcdeseneesceeeesssdeeesennenees 200 e Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACExn sss 204 Exporting Trace RESUS ic 0 te I etr e RR ERAI ERE RR MERERI NRER 208 e Retrieving RF Results crpee tenerte eerte epu Epp enn apnea 209 Retrieving Results 10 9 1 Retrieving Calculated Measurement Results The following commands describe how to retrieve the calculated results from the CDA CGONFigure CDPower BFSEPVTImSIISTIRESUlU ct iita trot nee eere 199 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion CDPower RESult lt ResultType gt This command queries the results of the code domain measurement Refer to chap ter 3 1 1 Code Domain Parameters on page 14 for a detailed description of all results The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Query parameters lt ResultType gt Retrieving Results ACTive Returns the number of active channels ARCD Returns the Average Relative Code Domain Error CDPabsolute Returns the absolute channel power in dBm CDPRelative Returns the relative channel power in dB CHANnel Returns the current channel number CERror Returns the Chip Rate Error in ppm DACTive Indicates whether DwPTS slot is active BTS mode only DPOWer Power in the DwPTS slot BTS mode
191. he DwPTS UpPTS slot See table 10 4 For RF measurements Returns the results of the peak list evaluation for Spurious Emis sion and Spectrum Emission Mask measurements For details see table 10 3 Return values lt AbsLevel gt dBm or lt RelLevel gt Absolute level of the channel at the selected channel slot or Relative level of the channel at the selected channel slot refer enced to CPICH or total power Depending on SENSe CDPower PDISplay on page 178 lt ActiveFlag gt 0 1 Flag to indicate whether a channel is active 1 or not 0 lt CError gt Chip Rate Error in ppm lt CDPAbsolute gt Code domain power absolute or relative to total signal power lt CDPRelative gt data parts ChannelType 0 2 Type of the channel 0 inactive 1 midamble 2 DPCH lt CodeClass gt lt CodeNo gt lt EVMPeak gt lt EVMRMS gt lt FError gt lt CIQImbal gt lt lQOffset gt lt MAccuracy gt lt MAShift gt lt AMiD1 gt lt AMiD2 gt lt ModType gt lt PCDError gt lt PD1 gt lt PD2 gt lt PData gt lt PMidamble gt lt reserved1 4 gt lt RHO gt lt SF gt Retrieving Results 0 4 Code class of the channel The code class specifies the spread ing factor of the channel 0 spreading factor 1 1 spreading factor 2 2 spreading factor 4 3 spreading factor 8 4 spreading factor 16 1 16 Code number of the channel The number of codes depends on the sprea
192. he evaluation range depending on the result display Note that the set slot channel is analyzed within the application data If the analysis interval does not yet show the required area of the capture buffer move through the sets slots channels in the evaluation range or correct the appli cation data range 6 Ifthe Sequencer is off select the Refresh softkey in the Sweep menu to update the result displays for the changed application data 10 10 1 Introduction Remote Commands for TD SCDMA Mea surements The following commands are required to perform measurements in TD SCDMA appli cations in a remote environment It assumes that the R amp S FSW has already been set up for remote operation in a network as described in the base unit manual Note that basic tasks that are also performed in the base unit in the same way are not described here For a description of such tasks see the R amp S FSW User Manual In particular this includes Managing Settings and Results i e storing and loading settings and result data Basic instrument configuration e g checking the system configuration customizing the screen layout or configuring networks and remote operation Using the common status registers The following topics specific to TD SCDMA applications are described here ATO DW eroe P 124 e Common OUIIDXDS aes ci sate verias cep Ent terrea vet e Y Re Xe ce esce a yeu nU Dto a E pua EE Rr vane
193. he signal power in the time domain against a transmission power mask defined by the TD SCDMA specification transmit ON OFF power time mask This measurement is meant to ensure that each burst remains within a tight power range i e rises and falls very quickly For downlink measurements the power in the slots reserved for the uplink transmis sion must quickly fall to the low value and then quickly rise to high again in the slots for downlink transmission Thus the slots of interest in downlink Power vs Time measure ments are slot 1 to the slot indicated by the Switching Point in which the OFF power is checked 0 00245 __ Fig 3 16 Power vs Time diagram for TD SCDMA BTS application In the TD SCDMA UE application it is assumed that only one uplink device is to be checked during one measurement and that each uplink device may use only a single slot for transmission Thus for uplink measurements only one slot is checked against the transmit mask Since the TD SCDMA UE application has no information which slot is being used it assumes the first slot in which a burst is detected to be slot 1 the first slot for uplink transmission In this slot the power must quickly rise to the high value and quickly fall back to low at the end Thus the slot of interest in uplink Power vs Time measurements is slot 1 which cannot be changed and in which the ON power is checked 0 000775 s Fig 3 17 Power vs Time diagram for TD SCDMA U
194. hey can be detected easily by the receiver User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 42 Channels and Codes Table 4 3 Special channels in TD SCDMA signals Name Description Slot No Spreading factor Code No 1 SF SF P CCPCH1 Primary common 0 16 1 control physical channel 1 P CCPCH2 Primary common 0 16 2 control physical channel 2 Other special control channels do not have a fixed code but are identified by higher layers The user data is contained in the Dedicated Physical Channel DPCH The detected type of the channel is indicated in the Channel Table evaluation accord ing to the following assignment Table 4 4 Available channel types in TD SCDMA signals No Channel type 0 inactive 1 midamble 2 DPCH user data 4 3 2 Channel Characteristics The spreading factor used by a channel determines the data rate Based on a sub frame length of 5 ms the bits per slot can be calculated The modulation used to transmit the user data determines how many bits are required for each symbol and thus the maximum number of symbols per slot Thus the symbol rate depends on the used modulation and the data rate The following tables show the relationships Table 4 5 Number of symbols per slot depending on spreading factor Spreading factor Number of symbols 16 44 8 88 4 176 2 352 1 704 Table 4 6 Number of bits per symbol depending on modula
195. hips of the selected slot The magnitude error is calculated as the difference of the magnitude of the received signal to the magnitude of the reference signal The reference signal is estimated from the channel configuration of all active channels The magnitude error is related to the square root of the mean power of reference signal and given in percent e100 N 2560 ke 0 N 1 MAG magnitude error of chip number k Sk complex chip value of received signal Xk complex chip value of reference signal k index number of the evaluated chip N number of chips at each CPICH slot n index number for mean power calculation of reference signal R amp S FSW K76 K77 Measurements and Result Display 1 Magnitude Error vs Chip Chip 0 256 hip Fig 3 6 Magnitude Error vs Chip display for TD SCDMA BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MECHip see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 183 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 Marker Table Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers This table may be displayed automatically if configured accordingly see Marker Table Display on page 115 4 Marker Table X value Y value 13 25 GHz 200 0 dBm 0 0 dB 600 0 kHz 600 0 kHz 2 0 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 183 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 215 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y
196. hods available for TD SCDMA applications are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode when you do one of the following Select the EJ SmartGrid icon from the toolbar e Select the Display button in the Overview Press the MEAS key e Select the Display Config softkey in any TD SCDMA menu Code Domain Analysis Up to 16 evaluation methods can be displayed simultaneously in separate windows The TD SCDMA evaluation methods are described in chapter 3 1 2 Evaluation Meth ods for Code Domain Analysis on page 16 To close the SmartGrid mode and restore the previous softkey menu select the 2 Close icon in the righthand corner of the toolbar or press any key o For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual 6 2 Code Domain Analysis TD SCDMA measurements require special applications on the R amp S FSW which you activate using the MODE key When you activate a TD SCDMA application the first time a set of parameters is passed on from the currently active application center frequency and frequency offset reference level and reference level offset attenuation After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily When you activate a TD SCDMA application Code Domain Analysis of the input signal is started automatically with
197. hort Form on page 126 Querying text parameters When you query text parameters the system returns its short form Common Suffixes Example Setting SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE NORMal Query SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE would return NORM 10 1 6 4 Character Strings Strings are alphanumeric characters They have to be in straight quotation marks You can use a single quotation mark or a double quotation mark Example INSTRument DELete Spectrum 10 1 6 5 Block Data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 follow ing digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the trans mission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted 0 specifies a data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite for mat requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length 10 2 Common Suffixes In TD SCDMA applications the following common suffixes are used in remote com mands Suffix Value range Description
198. i vated with different measurement settings by creating several channels for the same application Only one measurement can be performed at any time namely the one in the currently active channel However in order to perform the configured measurements consecu tively a Sequencer function is provided If activated the measurements configured in the currently active channels are per formed one after the other in the order of the tabs The currently active measurement is indicated by a amp symbol in the tab label The result displays of the individual channels are updated in the tabs including the MultiView as the measurements are per formed Sequential operation itself is independent of the currently displayed tab For details on the Sequencer function see the R amp S FSW User Manual Understanding the Display Information The following figure shows a measurement diagram during a TD SCDMA BTS mea surement All different information areas are labeled They are explained in more detail in the following sections The basic screen elements are identical for TD SCDMA UE measurements MultiView 33 Spectrum TD SCDMA BTS Ref Level 0 00 d amp m Freq 13 25 GHz Channel 1 16 Code Power AS 10c Slot of6 Data Rate 1 Code Domain powa 2 Code 1 L ode 2 Result Summary General Results Se 0 Slot Results Slot 0 Channel Results 1 16 User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 10 Understanding the Display Information 1 Ch
199. i rsisi riirii ridens 83 SINGIS SWEEP inerte rero eek ete MERE 94 Sweep Config 393 SWEEP COUME siei rep esc Le cd erben 94 Synchronizaliohi cic corper 85 Trace Config ve 111 Trigger CONH rrr erm tt 77 Trigger Offset erret 81 Upper Level Hysteresis ntt 96 Span MODUS recette ened as eere tere ne 51 Specifics for Configuration ooh ure eere tires 54 100 Spectrum Emission Mask See SEM pssi 34 Spreading factor B SlCS eic og Lore a aA 42 State Gi II 93 Status registers COMEM S Rm 224 STAT QUESPOW tcc terr sere rer deest 135 STATus QUEStionable SYNC ssssss 225 TD SGDMA ieee tee toc Da ET EAE 224 Subframes Basics Structure Suffixes COMMON er 129 Remote command Sresi iios ted etae ertet 126 Sweep y loo qt gio pm 93 94 Configuration remote sssnene 173 Configuration softkey aene 93 eren E 94 Switchirig POINT ocn err ener ene rere 40 Power vs Time BTS cis eerte 31 Symbol Constellation Evalu amp atiori c i nee e oec ree ipae Trace results Symbol EVM Evaluation Trace results Symbol Magnitude Error EValUaAtiON ihn iecore eerte ete o Crete diebus 29 Jirace res ult cipe neo odo ae et Hed 208 Symbol Phase Error Eval atiOri io e hice eco te deeds 29 Trace resulte cuori eos etae ttr retineo pera 208 Symbol rate Configuring in channel table
200. idambles and channels of a data slot If this option is enabled phase rotations between the channels are allowed Each channel gets its own phase reference from the associated midamble according to section AA 2 of the standard document 3GPP TS 25 221 If the associated midamble is missing the common phase reference is used for this channel Remote command SENSe CDPower STSLot ROTate on page 167 6 2 8 Channel Detection The channel detection settings determine which channels are found in the input signal General Channel Detection Setlihgs eerte tote nae tenue 87 Channel Table Managetrient caretes cena Fc eb cea Eo e Ea dca 89 e Channel Table Settings and Functions essssssseeeeeeneee 90 Channel Detal c EE 92 6 2 8 1 General Channel Detection Settings Channel detection settings are configured in the Channel Detection dialog box which is displayed when you select the Channel Detection button in the configuration Over view Code Domain Analysis Data Rate Inactive Channel Threshold Max Mod Setting Max Modulation Predefined Channel Tables Use Predefined Channel Table Predefined AutoSearch Predefined Tables New lt none gt Channel Tables lt none gt Fig 6 1 Channel detection configuration for TD SCDMA BTS application Inactive Channel Threshold 2 itii er ederet cae e ee de eed a eee ceo t ehe eov reae 88 Max ModulatiOh 2 o tte eee e e ete
201. ig 2 1 Window title bar information in TD SCDMA applications 1 Window number 2 Window type 3 Trace color 4 Trace number 5 Detector Diagram footer information For most graphical evaluations the diagram footer beneath the diagram contains scal ing information for the x axis where applicable Understanding the Display Information e Start slot symbol code sSslot symbol code per division Stop slot symbol code Status bar information Global instrument settings the instrument status and any irregularities are indicated in the status bar beneath the diagram Furthermore the progress of the current operation is displayed in the status bar Code Domain Analysis 3 Measurements and Result Display 3 1 The TD SCDMA applications provide several different measurements for signals according to the TD SCDMA mode The main and default measurement is Code Domain Analysis In addition to the code domain power measurements specified by the TD SCDMA standard the TD SCDMA options offer measurements with predefined settings in the frequency and time domain e g channel power or power vs time mea surements Evaluation methods The captured and processed data for each measurement can be evaluated with vari ous different methods All evaluation methods available for the selected TD SCDMA measurement are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode Evaluation range You can restrict evaluation to a specific cha
202. iguring the Result Display Parameters Format SPLit Displays the MultiView tab with an overview of all active chan nels SINGIe Displays the measurement channel that was previously focused RST SING Example DISP FORM SPL DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE Size This command maximizes the size of the selected result display window temporarily To change the size of several windows on the screen permanently use the LAY SPL command see LAYout SPLitter on page 186 Parameters Size LARGe Maximizes the selected window to full screen Other windows are still active in the background SMALI Reduces the size of the selected window to its original size If more than one measurement window was displayed originally these are visible again RST SMALI Example DISP WIND2 LARG 10 7 2 Working with Windows in the Display The following commands are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the screen layout for a measurement channel as you do using the SmartGrid in manual operation Since the available evaluation types depend on the selected application some parameters for the following commands also depend on the selected measure ment channel LAYoutt A DDEWINDOW J iiciin nininini blue sa ntn te Rant ERR trek Rea aaah 183 LAY Gub GA Talog WINBONW I ricetta Er ea cea teu bn nete acte e RE De e adco tn ee na trug ot 185 LAY out DENtify AWIN pro EE 185 LAY ourRENOVelAV
203. imum value Analysis Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 117 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 117 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Positioning Delta Markers The following commands position delta markers on the trace CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXiMUM LEFT ccc00cccceesccesseseceesececeesceeseeeeeeeneees 219 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXiIMUM NEXT cccccecccecesceceseseeseseececseesseseeseeees 219 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK cessisse 220 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXiIMUM RIGHL ccccccccecescecesseeececeeeceseeceeeeeeseneeeaes 220 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINiIMUM LEFT 0ccccesssceceecececeseeceseseecsecceseneeeenees 220 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINiIMUM NEXT c cccccescccceesecesseseceeeseeceasecesseeeeeeees 220 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK eise 220 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINiMUM RIGHL 00ccccceeceeeseseceesececeesceess
204. in Analysis e Individual Marker Settings sseesssseeseeeeeeenenen nennen nennen 214 e General Marker Satllifs ioc Do cro cr end D de nc d da ate 217 e Positioning the MaEPKer i icio ei rider tre YE aaa AERIS QUELLI Ie S XY Yea 217 Individual Marker Settings CAL Gulate n MARKer mo STATe 2 2 2 2 1 tr iiiter dL oce conva nace a I EN ENEE 214 GALOulatesn MARKeEFSImSX iiit anit o etta eoe anao ricis Anar RR AnARELDQUA A ER Re AN ER RU ARR ERR n 215 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF cccccscccesssceceeccceceecesessseeceaceeesueeseseeeeseeceesaneessaes 215 CALCulatesmsDELTamarkersmP STATe natat tt tt orte etude eed 215 CAL Gulate lt ne DEL Tamiarker lt ime2A OFF 2 redd einer fos reote et esed coca Aa a 216 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X c ccccccccescccceeceseasseeeeecececeaceseseseeeeaceeecageeseseseeseneeees 216 CAL Culate lt n gt DEL Tamarker lt m X RELSIIVE i ceci op too ret cete t eer 216 CAL Gulate ns DELTatrniarkeretm 2WT uices etre ete renta dee duet assa sesta eese eee saura 216 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe State This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is cur rently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Analysis Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 Manual operation See Marker State on page 113 See Marker T
205. ined Level Low Pulse Length 100 0 us Send Trigger IL Trigger 3 Input Output For step by step instructions on configuring triggered measurements see the main R amp S FSW User Manual Missile UMS 79 L Trigger NONE NENNEN m 79 ld 1 KR u E 79 L External Trigger 1103 9 ett d etia tad tocaba leads 79 L Digital Dom 79 Muze E UM 80 xo 2 5 ENERO 80 Eus hr ND RERO E 81 ACTI 81 MEL c r RARO RN 81 Ligger HORN Loris ise uetus oo detto tmd cedit Dundee io aut nose E 81 L Capture Offset tette nente tto te ts 81 Tigger 20D eed 82 OWU TOE casera laa ances tsar ann dla sud seein Rao da tu b ia E 82 2 82 bu 14 MNT 82 BE Loo ENTRO 82 Code Domain Analysis Trigger Source The trigger settings define the beginning of a measurement Trigger Source Trigger Source Defines the trigger source If a trigger source other than Free Run is set TRG is displayed in the channel bar and the trigger source is indicated Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 159 Free Run Trigger Source Trigger Source No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitely Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 159 External Trigger 1 2 3 Trigger Source Trigger Source Data acquisition starts when the TTL signal fed into th
206. is one symbol phase error value for each symbol of the slot of a special channel Positive val ues of symbol phase error indicate a symbol phase that is larger than the expected ideal value negative symbol phase errors indicate a symbol phase that is less than the ideal one 1 Symbol Phase Error Symb 0 2Symb Symb 19 Fig 3 15 Symbol Phase Error display for TD SCDMA BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SPERror see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 183 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 SS Ee User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 29 R amp S9FSW K76 K77 Measurements and Result Display 3 1 3 CDA Measurements in MSRA Operating Mode The TD SCDMA BTS application can also be used to analyze data in MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA applications receive an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the application data The application data range is indicated in the MSRA Master by verti cal blue lines However the individual result displays of the application need not analyze the com plete data range The data range that is actually analyzed by the individual result dis play is referred to as the analysis interval In the TD SCDMA BTS application the analysis interval is automatically determined according to the selected channel slot or frame to analyze which is defined for the evaluation range depending on the result display The cu
207. isplay the command returns three values for each slot in the following order Slot 0 lt Level_0 gt Validity 0 Slot n Level n Validity n In addition to the power level the source of the power active inactive or alias channel is provided Whether the level is provided as an absolute or relative value depends on SENSe CDPower PDISplay on page 178 10 9 3 10 Power vs Symbol When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the absolute power of each symbol at the selected slot is transferred The number of symbols depends on the spreading factor see table 4 8 10 9 3 11 Power vs Time When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the peak power in the defined slot range for each measured subframe is transferred Retrieving Results The number of values depends on the number of subframes see No of Subframes on page 101 10 9 3 12 Result Summary For the Result Summary the command returns 25 values for the selected set slot and channel in the following order lt Slot gt lt PData gt lt PD1 gt lt PD2 gt lt PMidamble gt lt RHO gt lt MAccuracy gt lt PCDError gt lt FError gt lt CError gt lt TrigFrame gt IQlmbalance IQOffset lt ActiveFlag gt lt Sym Rate gt lt CodeNo gt lt SF gt lt CDPRelative gt lt CDPAbsolute gt lt EVMRMS gt lt EVM Peak gt lt reserved1 gt lt reserved2 gt lt reserved3 gt lt reserved4 gt For
208. ital Baseband Interface For R amp S FSW 26 or higher models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the pream plifier is activated For R amp S FSW 8 or 13 models the following settings are available Off Deactivates the preamplifier 15 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 15 dB 30 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 30 dB Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 153 INPut GAIN VALue on page 154 Amplitude Settings for Analog Baseband Input The following settings and functions are available to define amplitude settings for input via the optional Analog Baseband Interface in the applications that support it They can be configured via the AMPT key or in the Amplitude tab of the Input dialog box Amplitude Scale Reference Level Input Settings Offset Unit Full Scale Level Mode Value The input settings provided here are identical to those in the Input Source gt Analog Baseband tab see Analog Baseband Input Settings on page 60 Code Domain Analysis For more information on the optional Analog Baseband Interface see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual Reference OVEN ERE 74 L Shifting ihe Display Offsel oett Diete estis stie Ibid saooteceasis 74 oi RC 74 L Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 74 Full Scale Level Mode Value ssssssseeeseeeene eene enn
209. ite Constellation on page 20 See Composite EVM on page 21 See Mag Error vs Chip on page 22 See Peak Code Domain Error on page 23 See Phase Error vs Chip on page 24 See Power vs Slot on page 25 See Power vs Symbol on page 26 See Result Summary on page 27 See Symbol Constellation on page 27 See Symbol EVM on page 28 See Symbol Magnitude Error on page 29 See Symbol Phase Error on page 29 See Power vs Time on page 31 Table 10 3 Return values for LIST parameter Spurious SEM measurements lowing order check For every measurement range you have defined range 1 n the command returns eight values in the fol lt No gt lt StartFreq gt lt StopFreq gt lt RBW gt lt PeakFreq gt lt PowerAbs gt lt PowerRel gt lt PowerDelta gt lt Limit Check gt lt Unused1 gt lt Unused2 gt lt No gt range number lt StartFreq gt lt StopFreq gt start and stop frequency of the range RBW resolution bandwidth lt PeakFreq gt frequency of the peak in a range lt PowerAbs gt absolute power of the peak in dBm lt PowerRel gt power of the peak in relation to the channel power in dBc lt PowerDelta gt distance from the peak to the limit line in dB positive values indicate a failed limit lt LimitCheck gt state of the limit check 0 PASS 1 FAIL e lt Unused1 gt lt Unused2 gt reserved 0 0 Retrieving Results Table 10 4 Return values for LIST parameter DwPTS Up
210. itless and phase rad values interleaved Requires DataType float32 or f1oat64 Q Parameter XML File Specification Element Description DataType Specifies the binary format used for samples in the I Q data binary file see DataFilename element and chapter 11 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 242 The following data types are allowed int8 8 bit signed integer data int16 16 bit signed integer data int32 32 bit signed integer data e f10at32 32 bit floating point data IEEE 754 e float64 64 bit floating point data IEEE 754 ScalingFactor Optional describes how the binary data can be transformed into values in the unit Volt The binary I Q data itself has no unit To get an I Q sample in the unit Volt the saved samples have to be multiplied by the value of the ScalingFactor For polar data only the magnitude value has to be multiplied For multi channel signals the ScalingFactor must be applied to all channels The attribute unit must be set to v The ScalingFactor must be gt 0 If the ScalingFactor element is not defined a value of 1 V is assumed NumberOfChan Optional specifies the number of channels e g of a MIMO signal contained in the nels I Q data binary file For multi channels the I Q samples of the channels are expected to be interleaved within the I Q data file see chapter 11 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 242 If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is
211. k DWETS cnet tre Ee ct INUEDDOE 1s coat aed d teta e eie e e Number to capture 84 Selected 109 WP PU Si uite interit bea dere aiet 40 Softkeys Amplitude Config Ato AL ersen tecnica ddl AUTO LEVEN 22 21h eid use Capture Offset jg a Noll Channel Detection ren ntes 87 Code Domain Settings Continue Single Sweep A Continuous Sweep 98 BiglGonf one 2599 prenciljem 79 Display Cohflg i rr ertet 13 50 Evaluation Rage onire serite asier iei 108 Export seen we 49 External auro Free Run und 9 Frequency Config 76 IF Power 2 290 jio E M 49 Input Source CONG erret then 55 IQ Export e 149 IQ Import ene AO Lower Level Hysteresis 96 Marker Config 112 Meastime Auto 54 96 Meastime Manual issostni naii 96 MiTo teneor ertet rete eos pente ivt cabot be ee NS 117 Next Min 24117 Next Peak fhe TAL Norm Delta 114 Outputs Gonflg rrr terea 63 PEAK 5 tano cs x eg tede dece oM ee 117 Preamp ieie 73 Ref Level 70 74 Ref Level Offset 71 74 Mil cio M PM RUN 94 RF Atten Auto 22 RE Atten Manual inisinia ernai 72 Soale Config eet retten tenere rtp enne 75 Select Meas Signal Capture issi
212. l operation See Time Reference BTS mode on page 86 See Time Reference UE mode on page 86 Channel Detection The channel detection settings determine which channels are found in the input signal The commands required to work with channel tables are described here e General Channel Detection iere erectis teet te ee FE DE REEL APER DER RR dg 168 e Managing Channel Tables nene tentent eheu dann Dee kde sina 169 e Configuring Channel T bles reciente eterne knee 171 General Channel Detection The following commands configure how channels are detected in general Useful commands for general channel detection described elsewhere CONFigure CDPower CTABle STATe on page 170 Remote commands exclusive to general channel detection SENSe CDPower ICTReshold uusssisiseeesesesesese asa sn seien innt nn hann nnns sans sa ts sa sanas 168 SENSE pisei nir c m 168 SENSe CDPower ICTReshold lt ThresholdLevel gt This command defines the minimum power that a single channel must have compared to the total signal in order to be regarded as an active channel Channels below the specified threshold are regarded as inactive Parameters lt ThresholdLevel gt Range 100 dB to 0 dB RST 40 dB Example SENS CDP ICTR 100 Manual operation See Inactive Channel Threshold on page 88 SENSe CDPower MMAX lt ModType gt This command defines the highest modul
213. l signal to detect channels Which slot to analyze is defined here The values in the Channel Detection settings and in the Evaluation Range settings are identical Cancelling Configuration Closes the Channel Table dialog box without saving the changes Saving the Table Saves the changes to the table and closes the Channel Table dialog box Code Domain Analysis 6 2 8 4 Channel Details Channel details are configured in the Channel Table dialog box which is displayed when you select the New Copy or Edit buttons for a predefined channel table in the Channel Detection dialog box Channel X etection S TN BTS TD SCDMA UE Channel Table Setting a EET Name MyTable MA Shifts Cell J 55 enum TestTable J 16 To edit channel settings select the corresponding cell in the table and enter the new value Gray cells are read only and cannot be edited S ct 92 Ghannel Number Chr AE eat etti ite eaten decl te er rrt t 92 SV MUON Sete ceret Rp LER tempo ro ee Pee uuundes ee on tier ep ces uite a 92 IVC AED EE 93 Midatnble SIR i oen det lr rt dard ted dar tete deel tb deett edat 93 c 93 Doman Cob crpi IC 93 Channel Type Type of channel For a list of possible channel types see chapter 4 3 1 Special Chan nels on page 42 Remote command CONFigure CDPower CTABle DATA on page 172 Channel Number Ch SF Channel number define
214. lation Manual operation See Channel Type on page 92 See Channel Number Ch SF on page 92 See State on page 93 CONFigure CDPower CTABle MSHift lt MAShift gt This command defines the number of midamble shifts in the channel table This value replaces the value defined by SENSe CDPower MSHift on page 165 Parameters numeric value 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 RST 16 Example CONF CDP CTAB MSH 4 Sets the number of midamble shifts to 4 Manual operation See MA Shifts Cell on page 91 See Midamble Shift on page 93 Sweep Settings imc oleo m isana aiaiai iaaiiai aia araa 173 SENSE SWE P GOUNE ciinii anaE AAE NEE EER TEE 173 SENSe AVERage lt n gt COUNt lt AverageCount gt SENSe SWEep COUNt lt SweepCount gt This command defines the number of measurements that the application uses to aver age traces In case of continuous measurement mode the application calculates the moving aver age over the average count In case of single measurement mode the application stops the measurement and cal culates the average after the average count has been reached Example SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of measurements to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for its end 10 5 8 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Sweep Average Count on page 94 Automatic Settings QD MSRA operati
215. le SYNC EVENt lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the EVENt section of the status register The command also deletes the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the CONDition section of the status register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only Commands for Compatibility STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the ENABle part of a register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to be reported in the summary bit If a bitis 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable SYNC NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt
216. lute values or relative to the total signal data parts only By default the power relative to the total signal is displayed The composite EVM peak code domain error and composite constellation measure ments are also always referenced to the total signal 3 1 1 Code Domain Analysis Remote command CONF CDP BTS MEAS CDP see CONFigure CDPower MEASurement on page 133 e Code DomaliimPararmele s xccrnr rcnt renta encanta nre a e ced 14 e Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis sese 16 e CDA Measurements in MSRA Operating Mode seen 30 Code Domain Parameters Two different types of measurement results are determined and displayed in the Result Summary global results and channel results for the selected channel The number of the slot and channel code at which the measurement is performed is indicated globally for the measurement in the channel bar The spreading code of the selected channel is indicated with the channel number in the channel bar and above the channel specific results in the Result Summary In the Channel Table the analysis results for all active channels are displayed indi vidually Table 3 1 General and slot specific code domain power results in the Result Summary Parameter Description Chip Rate Error The chip rate error in ppm A large chip rate error results in symbol errors and there fore in possible synch
217. ly generated reference signal Code Domain Analysis Parameter Description Average RCDE Average Relative Code Domain Error over all channels The Average RCDE is calcu lated according to release 8 of the standard Composite EVM The error vector magnitude EVM over the total signal in the selected slot The EVM is the root of the ratio of the mean error power to the power of an ideally generated reference signal See also Composite EVM on page 21 Pk CDE 15 ksps The Peak Code Domain Error projects the difference between the measured signal and the ideal reference signal onto the spreading factor in the selected slot see Peak Code Domain Error on page 23 The symbol rate from which the spreading factor can be determined is indicated in brackets DwPTS UpPTS parameters Optionally the following parameters determined for the Downlink Pilot Time Slot DwPTS or the Uplink Pilot Time Slot UpPTS see also chapter 4 2 Frames Sub frames and Slots on page 40 can be displayed in the Result Summary e Subframe Number Subframe the slot belongs to e DwPTS UpPTS Active Indicates whether DwPTS UpPTS slot is active e DwPTS UpPTS Power Power in the DwPTS UpPTS slot e DwPTS UpPTS Rho RHO for the DwPTS UpPTS slot e DwPTS UpPTS EVM RMS EVM RMS for the DwPTS UpPTS slot e DwPTS UpPTS EVM Peak EVM Peak for the DwPTS UpPTS slot The channel specific results are displayed in
218. lysis button in the Overview to configure how the data is evalu ated in the individual result displays e Select the channel slot and set to be evaluated e Configure specific settings for the selected evaluation method s e Optionally configure the trace to display the average over a series of measure ments If necessary increase the Sweep Average Count in the Sweep Con fig dialog box e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the results e g when comparing errors or peaks 12 Start a new measurement with the defined settings In MSRA mode you may want to stop the continuous measurement mode by the Sequencer and perform a single data acquisition a Select the Sequencer icon E from the toolbar b Set the Sequencer state to OFF c Press the RUN SINGLE key To define or edit a channel table Channel tables contain a list of channels to be detected and their specific parameters You can create user defined and edit pre defined channel tables 1 Select the Channel Detection softkey from the main Code Domain Analyzer menu to open the Channel Detection dialog box 2 To define a new channel table select the New button next to the Predefined Tables list To edit an existing channel table a Select the existing channel table in the Predefined Tables list b Select the Edit button next to the Predefined Tables list 3 In the Channel Table dialog box defin
219. lyzer mode see chapter 6 2 5 Signal Capture Data Acquisition on page 83 In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the analysis interval for the TD SCDMA BTS measurement see Capture Offset on page 81 Code Domain Analysis The analysis interval cannot be edited manually but is determined automatically according to the selected channel slot or set to analyze which is defined for the evalu ation range depending on the result display Note that the set slot channel is analyzed within the application data For details see chapter 4 5 CDA Measurements in MSRA Operating Mode on page 46 6 2 7 Synchronization The individual channels in the input signal need to be synchronized to detect timing off sets in the slot spacings These settings are described here Synchronization Common Settings Scrambling Code MA Shift Cell Number of Users Sync To Rotate code channel to associated midamble cumm Scrambling CODO e 85 SYNG UL Code UE ONIY m 85 MA Shift Call 7 Number Of USOS avec een eite dicet teret reiten ette xara 85 Time Reference BTS mode ener a ina enr CH EL 2S ER ARE Co ES 86 Time Reference UE modoe rir tette Eaa 86 PIT NE 86 Rotate code channel to associated midamble eene 87 Scrambling Code Sets the Scrambling Code of the base station Possible valu
220. m without optional keywords BAND 1MHZ would have the same effect as BWID 1MHZ 10 1 6 SCPI Parameters Many commands feature one or more parameters If a command supports more than one parameter these are separated by a comma Example LAYout ADD WINDow Spectrum LEFT MTABle Parameters may have different forms of values e OMEN VAES caen IEEE 127 e BOO lG8N cere eoe erb eb rk tebd e su Reel esseri e Ped viasadeaanvaves EXE E SUD SR TREES Sa gx OE 128 e Charactef Da epa Irina rect ee ca da ede aun 128 e Character SUNOS eta scape edet ree trc etd ve dec e tri o rd e deca bad eg 129 TER E oe a D e oos esee ere ee rentre Pepe dae p OUR dete 129 10 1 6 1 Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point or exponent In case of physical quantities you can also add the unit If the unit is missing the com mand uses the basic unit Example with unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ without unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1E9 would also set a frequency of 1 GHz Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down If the number you have entered is not supported e g in case of discrete steps the command returns an error Instead of a number you can also set numeric values with a text parameter in special cases e MIN MAX Defines the minimum or maximum numeric value that is supported e DEF Defines the default value 10 1 6
221. mat iqQetan sisscscsiiessinssissacedisaseessssssnsisaaaesncaiaveniaioanans 238 I Q Parameter XML File Specification cccccceessseeeeeeesseeeeeeesseeeeeesesseeeenensseeeees 238 VQ Data Binary File 5 n eroe ri tn rer neuere exneeeuetsautepuaceeterenatessseeseientenasates 242 List of Remote Commands TD SCDMA eese 244 e 248 R amp S FSW K76 K77 Preface 1 Preface 1 1 About this Manual This TD SCDMA User Manual provides all the information specific to the TD SCDMA applications All general instrument functions and settings common to all applications and operating modes are described in the main R amp S FSW User Manual The main focus in this manual is on the measurement results and the tasks required to obtain them The following topics are included Welcome to the TD SCDMA Measurements Application Introduction to and getting familiar with the application e Measurements and Result Displays Details on supported measurements and their result types Measurement Basics Background information on basic terms and principles in the context of the mea surement Configuration Analysis A concise description of all functions and settings available to configure measure ments and analyze results with their corresponding remote control command e J Q Data Import and Export Description of general functions to import and export raw I Q me
222. matically the next time you re enter the measurement The main measurement configuration menus for the RF measurements are identical to the Spectrum application For details refer to General Measurement Configuration in the R amp S FSW User Man ual The measurement specific settings for the following measurements are available in the Analysis dialog box via the Overview POWER VS TIME uoce ERR a aa KR Ge Du MRNA R LIE AM ER UEM RE deRu TE 98 e Signal Channel Power Measurements ssssesssseeeeenenen enn 102 e Channel Power ACLR Measurements cesses eiie senden nhse kde annii 102 Spechum Emlissiom Mask ertet rere eee depen ele xt oes 104 e Occupied Bahdwidlhi ti t e es Reines t qc de dek Tuned adeunt 105 E O O E uiae tiere d ere Sree Red Pn sence LE RERO DUE ener ny ERR SERERE AR FERA ER creepers 106 6 3 1 Power vs Time The Power vs Time measurement checks the signal power against a transmission power mask defined by the TD SCDMA specification 6 3 1 1 6 3 1 2 Frequency and Time Domain Measurements Default Settings for PvT Measurements 2 eese eei ttn dnte 99 FYT Gonng Graton OVE VIBGW veter e ett EM ces Ere ex ERE 99 PvT Measurement Settings sss eene nnnm nnns 100 Default Settings for PVT Measurements By default the following settings are used for a Power vs Time measurement in the TD SCDMA BTS application
223. measure ments are identical to the Spectrum application However an additional function is pro vided to adapt the SEM measurement to the current TD SCDMA signal Adapting the Measurement to the Current Signal You can adapt the measurement range to the current TD SCDMA signal Start Slot Stop Slot Adapting the Measurement to the Current Signal BTS application only Defines the measurement range for Channel Power measurements as a range of slots in the current TD SCDMA signal e g the downlink slots 4 to 6 for a Switching Point 3 Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SLOT STARt on page 181 SENSe POWer ACHannel SLOT STOP on page 181 6 3 5 Frequency and Time Domain Measurements Auto Level amp Time Adapting the Measurement to the Current Signal Automatically adjusts the reference level and the trigger offset to subframe start to their optimum levels for the current signal This prevents overloading the R amp S FSW When this function is activated current measurements are aborted and resumed after the automatic level detection is finished Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel AUTO LTIMe on page 180 Occupied Bandwidth The Occupied Bandwidth measurement determines the bandwidth that the signal occu pies The occupied bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth in which in default settings 99 of the total signal power is to be found The percentage of the signal power to be included in
224. ment and DataType element To allow reading and writing of streamed I Q data all data is interleaved i e complex values are interleaved pairs of and Q values and multi channel signals contain interleaved complex sam ples for channel 0 channel 1 channel 2 etc If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is presumed Example Element order for real data 1 channel I 0 Real sample 0 I 1 Real sample 1 I 2 Real sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel I 0 Q 0 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 0 I 1 QLI Real and imaginary part of complex sample 1 I 2 Q 2 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex polar data 1 channel Mag 0 Phi 0 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 0 Mag 1 Phi l Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 1 Mag 2 Phi 2 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 3 channels Complex data I channel no time index Q channel no time index 0 1 0 Q 0 0 Channel 0 Complex sample 0 1 Ode QI fol Channel 1 Complex sample 0 2 0 Q 2 0 Channel 2 Complex sample 0 0 1 O 0 1 Channel 0 Complex sample 1 Ta GTI Pay Channel 1 Complex sample 1 2 1 1 Q 21 1 Channel 2 Complex sample 1 Q Data Binary File I 0 2 Q10 21 Chan
225. mon Mode Offsel 2 oret ei tree Eee ede e eiit d eee te etude 63 Micro buton ACH OI tacens eee veo cae te ee rece ac dee ecce wes Dee aes ER Dee Eo Dr ace eU EUE 63 Common Mode Offset Sets the common mode offset The setting is only available if a differential probe is connected to the R amp S FSW If the probe is disconnected the common mode offset of the probe is reset to 0 0 V Remote command SENSe PROBe p SETup CMOFfset on page 146 Microbutton Action Active R amp S probes except for RT ZS10E have a configurable microbutton on the probe head By pressing this button you can perform an action on the instrument directly from the probe Select the action that you want to start from the probe Run single Starts one data acquisition No action Prevents unwanted actions due to unintended usage of the microbut ton Remote command SENSe PROBe p SETup MODE on page 147 Output Settings The R amp S FSW can provide output to special connectors for other devices For details on connectors refer to the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Front Rear Panel View chapters QD How to provide trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Output settings can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key or in the Outputs dia log box Code Domain Analysis IF Video Output IF Wide Out Frequency Noise Source Trigger 2 Trigger 3 Noise SOUFG
226. mote control programs If a sequential command cannot be completed for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger the remote control program will never finish and the remote channel to the R amp S FSW is blocked for further commands In this case you must inter rupt processing on the remote channel first in order to abort the measurement To do so send a Device Clear command from the control instrument to the R amp S FSW on a parallel channel to clear all currently active remote channels Depend ing on the used interface and protocol send the following commands Visa viClear e GPIB ibcir e RSIB RSDLLibclr Now you can send the ABORt command on the remote channel performing the mea surement Example ABOR INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and immediately starts a new one Example ABOR WAI INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and starts a new one once abortion has been completed Usage Event SCPI confirmed INITiate lt n gt CONMeas This command restarts a single measurement that has been stopped using ABORt or finished in single measurement mode The measurement is restarted at the beginning not where the previous measurement was stopped As opposed to INITiate lt n gt IMMediate this command does not reset traces in maxhold minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measure ments using maxhold or averaging functions Suffix n irrelevant
227. n the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and 1 Q Input User Manual Remote command MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe on page 221 Export Opens a submenu to configure data export I Q Export Export Opens a file selection dialog box to select an export file to which the IQ data will be stored This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process I Q data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt 10 STATe on page 221 MMEMory STORe lt n gt 1IQ COMMent on page 221 Result Display Configuration 6 Configuration The TD SCDMA applications provide several different measurements for signals according to the TD SCDMA application The main and default measurement is Code Domain Analysis In addition to the code domain power measurements specified by the TD SCDMA standard the TD SCDMA options offer measurements with predefined settings in the frequency and time domain e g channel power or pow
228. ncy error CALC MARK FUNC CDP BTS RES FERR Result 0 1 Hz Table 10 9 Trace results for Relative Code Domain Power measurement Code class Channel no Abs power level Rel power level Timing offset dBm chips 8 000000000 0 000000000 4 319848537 3 011176586 0 000000000 2 000000000 1 000000000 4 318360806 3 009688854 1 000000000 8 000000000 0 000000000 7 348078156E 7 217211151E 1 000000000 001 001 10 15 4 10 15 5 Programming Examples TD SCDMA BTS Measurement 4 Triggered Measurement of Relative Code Domain Power Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Activate a TD SCDMA BTS measurement channel named BTSMeasurement INST CRE NEW BTDS BTSMeasurement Set the reference level to 10 dBm DISP TRAC Y SCAL RLEV 10 Set the center frequency to 2 1175 GHz FREQ CENT 2 1175 GHz f2 5 22 Configuring the measurement Set the trigger source to the external trigger TRIGGER INPUT connector TRIG SOUR EXT Optimize the scaling of the y axis for the current measurement DISP TRAC Y SCAL AUTO ONCE escesecses Performing the measurement Stops continuous sweep INIT CONT OFF Sets the number of sweeps to be performed to 10 SWE COUN 10 Start a new measurement with 10 sweeps and wait for the end INIT WAI fec sasssseses Retrieving results Retrieve
229. ne nena n nnn sa nn ana nn n nnns 40 Channels and Codes eeeseeeeeeeeeeen nenas kann hana aa haue RR R4 AR RR RS RR RR ARR RR RR RR RR Ra ad 42 Data Fields and Midambles 1 eseeeeeeeeeeee eene nnne nnne nnne nnne aa nnne nnn 45 CDA Measurements in MSRA Operating Mode eee 46 I Q Data Import and Export ssseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeenenn 48 Import Export FUNCTIONS ccceceeeeeecee cence ee eee eens ee eee eee eeeeeee see nnn nnnm ne nnn n nnn nn nnn nanna 48 A OMEN NN AE m 50 Result Display Configuration 0 cccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaseaeeeseeeeeeeseseeeeeeeenanees 50 Code Domain Analysis iine ree ERR RRXRRRRRERUdR RARNCERUMERRRRNRRRRNRARE ERR ENRRRREKRENRRARA santos 51 Frequency and Time Domain Measurements eese 98 ILLI aiani 108 Evaluation T 108 Code Domain Analysis Settings eese 109 BClIBRIURT OI LEITET 111 MarKBES iiiin ii ek ac Hana E ca avuxo E aav kPavx Ya Ce eda Ea EXE SERT CR eA davEU XN YPaR END AKA YE 112 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement 118 Error Messages 7 nire ir EHE cosceeccenanaudecicadadteneceesauceceeascuceceeeasutens 118 User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 3 10 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7
230. nel 0 Complex sample 2 I 1 2 1 Q 11 2 Channel 1 Complex sample 2 I 2 1 21 Q 21 2 Channel 2 Complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel This example demonstrates how to store complex cartesian data in float32 format using MATLAB Save vector of complex cartesian I Q data i e iqiqiq N 100 iq randn 1 N 1j randn 1 N fid fopen xyz complex float32 w for k 1 length iq fwrite fid single real iq k f10oat32 fwrite fid single imag iq k f10at32 end fclose fid List of Remote Commands TD SCDMA js EST H DATE Mii Les encesesctir a hese el aded ia een ane dletee a eecagaa ea deat 174 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DU HRGliOn ii cio a a oc c VE UR eae Che E 174 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE 5 2 non ener tritt rn t nent th rbd 175 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYS Teresis LOWer once rre dt a rh nee nnno 175 SENSe JAD3Just CONFigure H YS Teresis UPPer i cire ter apap een Ee ERE exe Rees ERE Do ERRAT 176 SENSe ADJust LEVel SENSe JAVERage lt n gt COUNE n 173 SENSE CDPOWwEr CODE e e Em 176 SENSe CDPower EIE Ter iS TAT6 cnt rrr rene en rn eet rr nir rather inh ht Fe ada 163 SENSe CDPower ICTEIeshold arreter ettet nr ese re ta eaae gen RR ibreak 168 SENS6e GDPower IGbBerglly xa i odores n nie e cop ad v be EO e ad eoa aa etnenas 164 SENSe CDPower DEVel ADJUsl cien
231. nes one phase reference for all midam bles and channels of a data slot If this function is enabled phase rotations between the channels are allowed Each channel gets its own phase reference from the associ ated midamble according to section AA 2 of the standard document 3GPP TS 25 221 If the associated midamble is missing the common phase reference is used for this channel Parameters Mode ON OFF RST OFF Example CDP STSL ROT ON Allows phase rotations between channels Manual operation See Rotate code channel to associated midamble on page 87 SENSe CDPower SULC lt SyncUL gt Defines the code used for synchronization on the UpPTS see Time Reference UE mode on page 86 This command is available for UE mode K77 only Parameters lt SyncUL gt integer For details on available values depending on the scrambling code see table 4 1 Range 0 to 255 RST 0 Example CDP SULC 28 Sets the code 28 Manual operation See SYNC UL Code UE only on page 85 SENSe CDPower TREF lt numeric value gt Defines which slot is used as a time reference for synchronization Parameters lt numeric value gt DPTS Uses the Downlink Pilot Time Slot DWPTS as a time reference UPTS Uses the Uplink Pilot Time Slot UpPTS as a time reference SLOT Uses slot 0 BTS mode or slot 1 UE mode as a time reference RST SLOT Example CDP TREF DPTS 10 5 6 10 5 6 1 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Manua
232. ng defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted auto matically Parameters Threshold Range O dB to 200 dB RST 1dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST LOW 2 For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level falls below 18 dBm Manual operation See Lower Level Hysteresis on page 96 Configuring Code Domain Analysis SENSe ADJust CONF igure HYSTeresis UPPer Threshold When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 176 command the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted automatically Parameters Threshold Range 0 dB to 200 dB RST 1 dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST UPP 2 Example For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm Manual operation See Upper Level Hysteresis on page 96 SENSe ADJust LEVel This command initiates a single internal measurement that evaluates and sets the ideal reference level for the current input dat
233. ng examples The user manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FSW in general and the Spectrum application in particular Furthermore the soft ware functions that enhance the basic functionality for various applications are descri Conventions Used in the Documentation bed here An introduction to remote control is provided as well as information on main tenance instrument interfaces and troubleshooting In the individual application manuals the specific instrument functions of the applica tion are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parame ters refer to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FSW is not inclu ded in the application manuals All user manuals are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html Service Manual This manual is available in PDF format on the Documentation CD ROM delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications instru ment function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R amp S FSW by replacing modules Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified func tions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corre sponding firmware ver
234. ng mode In MSRA operating mode the following commands are not available as they require a new data acquisition However TD SCDMA applications cannot perform data acquisi tion in MSRA operating mode Useful commands for adjusting settings automatically described elsewhere DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 151 Remote commands exclusive to adjusting settings automatically SENSe AD dust Ales EE 174 SENS JADJUst CONF IQUE DU RONG x acci uar ettet euet ead te eee eene 174 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE essen nennen nere 175 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWEV ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaaaeaeaeaaeneeetenes 175 SENSe ADJuUsECONFIgure HYS Teresis PPer teat eoru aeter tdi uet darn tte na 176 simi PAULI aa a 176 SENSe ADJust ALL This command initiates a measurement to determine and set the ideal settings for the current task automatically only once for the current measurement This includes e Reference level Example ADJ ALL Usage Event Manual operation See Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All on page 95 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation Duration In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S FSW performs a measurement on the current input data This command defines the length of the measurement if SENSe ADJus
235. nly the general purpose bits GPO and GP1 are available as a Digital Q trigger source The following table describes the assignment of the general purpose bits to the LVDS connector pins For details on the LVDS connector see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer User Manual Table 6 1 Assignment of general purpose bits to LVDS connector pins Bit LVDS pin GPO SDATAA P Trigger1 GP1 SDATA4_P Trigger2 GP2 SDATAO P Reserve1 GP3 SDATAA P Reserve2 GP4 SDATAO P Marker1 GP5 SDATAA P Marker2 not available for Digital 1 Q enhanced mode Remote command TRIG SOUR GPO see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 159 IF Power Trigger Source Trigger Source The R amp S FSW starts capturing data as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the third intermediate frequency For frequency sweeps the third IF represents the start frequency The trigger band width at the third IF depends on the RBW and sweep type For measurements on a fixed frequency e g zero span or I Q measurements the third IF represents the center frequency This trigger source is only available for RF input This trigger source is available for frequency and time domain measurements only It is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface or the optional Analog Baseband Interface The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification A refer ence level offs
236. nnel frame or slot depending on the evalu ation method See chapter 7 1 Evaluation Range on page 108 e Codes Doman Alalysls cria a sur rade dote Par EU eR ERR ecnuRe 13 e Frequency and Time Domain Measurements ssssssssssseeeeneees 30 Code Domain Analysis The Code Domain Analysis measurement provides various evaluation methods and result diagrams A signal section containing at least two TD SCDMA subframes is recorded for analysis and then searched through to find the start of the first subframe If a subframe start is found in the signal the code domain power analysis is performed for the selected slot The different evaluations are calculated from the captured I Q data set Therefore it is not necessary to start a new measurement in order to change the evaluation The TD SCDMA applications provide the peak code domain error measurement and composite EVM specified by the TD SCDMA standard as well as the code domain power measurement of assigned and unassigned codes The power can be displayed either for all channels in one slot or for one channel in all slots The composite constel lation diagram of the entire signal can also be displayed In addition the symbols demodulated in a slot their power and the determined bits or the symbol EVM can be displayed for an active channel The power of a channel is always measured in relation to its symbol rate within the code domain It can be displayed either as abso
237. nnel slot or set to analyze which is defined for the evalu ation range depending on the result display The analysis interval can not be edited directly in the TD SCDMA BTS application but is changed automatically when you change the evaluation range User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 46 R amp S FSW K76 K77 Measurement Basics Analysis line A frequent question when analyzing multi standard signals is how each data channel is correlated in time to others Thus an analysis line has been introduced The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applications It can be positioned in any MSRA application or the MSRA Master and is then adjusted in all other applications Thus you can easily analyze the results at a specific time in the measurement in all applications and determine correlations If the marked point in time is contained in the analysis interval of the application the line is indicated in all time based result displays such as time symbol slot or bit dia grams By default the analysis line is displayed however it can be hidden from view manually In all result displays the AL label in the window title bar indicates whether or not the analysis line lies within the analysis interval or not e orange AL the line lies within the interval white AL the line lies within the interval but is not displayed hidden e no AL the line lies outside the interval MSRA View MSRA Mas TD SCDMA BTS Ref Level 0 00
238. nput Settings sssssssssssssssseeeee nene 67 6 2 8 Frontend Settings ssssssssssssssesssssesenenn nennen nennen nennen nnne nenne 69 6 2 3 1 Amplitude Settings nectit temere et ate hec epe rr Lena aue ape e ead u redet 70 6 2 3 2 Amplitude Settings for Analog Baseband Input ssssssssssssseeees 73 6 2 3 3 Y AXIS Scalitig iioi sister eat eae ta paie E eed d eu e Ra pred eee ERU 75 6 2 3 4 Frequency Settings eene nennen nnne nene 76 6 24 Trigger Settings ssssssssssssssssssesseeee enne A Eaa nnn nn entrent nnns enne 77 6 2 5 Signal Capture Data Acquisition 83 6 2 6 Application Data MSRA sssssssssssseseeenene nennen nnne nnns 84 6 2 7 Synchronization eene nennen nnm etre tnr en nennen nennen 85 6 2 8 Channel Detection senem ener nnne aaaea atada 87 6 2 8 1 General Channel Detection Settings ssssssssssssseeeeennne 87 6 2 8 2 Channel Table Management sse 89 6 2 8 3 Channel Table Settings and Functions ssssssssesssseeemeee 90 6 2 8 4 Channel Details eene entente nnne enne nennt 92 6 2 0 SWeep Seltings uiii azar e herren i apice Rd e dba SAU T RUE ER bo oa E 93 6 2 10 Automatic Settings sse ianiai EEREN ennemi enne 95 6 211 ZOOM FUNCUONS yee taseetcs areia a et EEE EEEE EENET AE EREE eed eee ance de 97 Code Domain Analysis 6 2 1 Configuration Overview Throughout the measureme
239. nt channel configuration an overview of the most important currently defined settings is provided in the Overview The Overview is displayed when you select the Overview icon which is available at the bottom of all softkey menus dd id n Overview TD SCDMA UE isle sig 1 Code Domain Power In addition to the main measurement settings the Overview provides quick access to the main settings dialog boxes Thus you can easily configure an entire measurement channel from input over processing to evaluation by stepping through the dialog boxes as indicated in the Overview The available settings and functions in the Overview vary depending on the currently selected measurement For frequency and time domain measurements see chap ter 6 3 Frequency and Time Domain Measurements on page 98 For Code Domain Analysis measurements the Overview provides quick access to the following configuration dialog boxes listed in the recommended order of process ing The Signal Description button indicated in the Overview is not required for TD SCDMA measurements 1 Select Measurement See chapter 3 Measurements and Result Display on page 13 2 Input Frontend See chapter 6 2 2 Data Input and Output Settings on page 54 3 Optionally Trigger See chapter 6 2 4 Trigger Settings on page 77 6 2 2 Code Domain Analysis 4 Signal Capture See chapter 6 2 5 Signal Capture Da
240. nt is started immediately when a TD SCDMA application is activated however you can stop and start a new measurement any time ABORT I Tc 191 st ure een MEAS c 192 INITiatesmno CONTIRUONS 22 itin Renee regn Re eran enar er Inr kn erben ALAIEN ER RTe A nATR Oan 193 INITiate n IMMediate esssesseseseseseeeeenene rennen enhn nnns nnns entr tr srt rn rrr rrr nnns 193 INITIatesnSEQu esncerABOBLE ioco tetti iina eO oxe tod epo rp Inch epi iD Ere dix 194 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMeCiate cccccecceceeceeessseeceeccceceaeecesseeeceaceeesaseeseaeeeeeaneeeeas 194 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer MODE cccccccccessceceeccceceececeseeeesessceecaaceseauecesseeceecageceseaseesanees 194 INITate lt n SEQuencen REFRESH ALL uita ttt paie peter retta ette hne 195 SYSTEM SEGUNDO certe ra greco ted ce ecce ret osa re desi sant oed area oi re sone do aad ASEEN 196 ABORt This command aborts the measurement in the current measurement channel and resets the trigger system Starting a Measurement To prevent overlapping execution of the subsequent command before the measure ment has been aborted successfully use the OPC or WAT command after ABOR and before the next command For details see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual To abort a sequence of measurements by the Sequencer use the INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt command Note on blocked re
241. o 16 SE cen decet ENATS RAET 37 SCLC CUNG eec 13 EVM SV MBO Meer 15 Exporting lex 48 49 52 242 I Q data remote rene rines 221 feci 49 Trace results remote 208 External trigQel cocos eter ite d pose een dn iih eie in redet 79 Level remote sarisini isina 158 F Files Format 1 Q data 1 Q data binary XML I Q parameter XML Filters Highi pass remote 5 eerte teen High pass RF input YIG f mol8 eis sessed oce emet edebat itcr aeta Format Data remote ertet me tn oce das 200 Frames BOSICS ccm cto tenuis edet edd irc Kv YER 40 Free Run TWIG QCM cos ioo t ode Ie sed ote tes nete n cio 79 Frequency onfiguratiOD sierras tte mecs hinein tie poene Configuration remote is once c c PEE Frequency domain TD SCDMA nit oti t m ee E Re Det 30 Frontend Configuration erect rct teet tex oet ia 69 Configuration remote anaoa 149 Full scale level Analog Baseband B71 remote control 144 Analog Baseband B71 D pipe Digital Q remote sees Unit digital 1 Q remote H Hardware settings CDA Displayed seriis ke ert tite ree tetra 11 High pass filter REMO codecs ree eii eros CU e toa icai Baty 136 ISESIDDUL dictse oerte Ere n De ree niin is ovid 57 Hysteresis Lower Auto level sseeeeeeeneen 96 Trigger Upper Auto level l I Q data Export file
242. ode Domain Analysis e Configuring the Data Input and Outp t cei teret 135 e Erontend GCORTIGUESUDI icccr ccce eerte emacs cr t Pr cete t cett teet de vdd 149 e Configuring Triggered Measurements cies etaed eaa 156 Signal Captiltiligi e re ree o re ere E ee ER EUH UNE ex ANS 163 e Gynchhonizstoli ecu cepere apa ece eee ra MARRE EE aaa LL aaan a aA PRU TAXE de adain 164 e Channel Detection etre ee Cede e ei tene ee o e c ede Du 168 LEN SWOOP SENGS M 173 e Automatic Sellllgs rex REF RARE e A ex cnet e REPAIR um A 174 e Evaluate retenciones eder bu dtt b leto cud ra d 176 e Code Domain Analysis Settings eire tette iter ree ELLE eue RE G4 177 10 5 1 10 5 1 1 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Configuring the Data Input and Output MEDI sees 135 e Configuring Digital VQ Input and Output cct ins rot inte rr tienes 138 e Configuring Input via the Optional Analog Baseband Interface 143 Sotting Up dolor DTP 145 e Conhiourimathio OBIDUES cite water ete ae ttc bition ren te dede es 148 RF Input INPUEATTenuation P ROTeBUOI REESBL coudre xo eer ane nett Cua et eren 135 INPUEGCONNOGOl RT HX 135 IIPS OU PUGS m HR 136 NEU pipere 136 INPut FIETerHPASSESTATe itte dee rca rea Reo eta eer ertt pte teen 136 INPUEFIET eR VICES TAT M
243. odulation see table 4 8 Channel Table For the Channel Table result display the command returns 11 values for each channel in the following order lt ChannelType gt CodeClass CodeNo ModType lt AbsLevel gt lt RelLevel gt MAShift lt AMiD1 gt lt AMiD2 gt reservedl lt reserved2 gt For details on these parameters see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 201 The output depends on the channel sorting order see CONFigure CDPower CTABle ORDer on page 177 In code sorting order all midambles are output first then control channels and last the data channels In midamble sorting order each midamble is output with its corresponding control and data channel Example The following example shows the results of a query for three active channels in com mon midamble allocation e Midamble m 3 3 0 dBm e DPCH 1 16 QPSK 7 78 dB e DPCH 2 8 QPSK 7 78 dB e DPCH 3 4 8PSK 7 78 dB In this example the command would return the following string Tp 0 0 0 3 0 0 3 0 005 0 005 0 0 2 p Ay l Ly 7 78 SAIS S Up OF Op 2 yQ Sy Zy Ly JZ790 4 78 Sy 0 0 0 0 2 3 24 9 2p lelap C ASIB Sp Uy 0 00 0 0 p Ay 2 Ll 342649 43 9 3 0 O0 O0 00 4 Sy Ty 460 9 49 9 3p 0 0 0 00 4 6 1 46 9 43 9 3 0 0 0 00 4 7 1 46 9 43 9 3 0 0 0 00 4 8 1 46 9 43 9 3 0 0 O 00 4 13 1 46 9 43 9 3 0 0 0 00 4 14 1 46 9 243 9
244. omain Error see PODE c 23 Peak list Evaluation method sasise 2 eate ticis 39 Peak search I Gy iiia eee A E Ud head eu e 117 MOG 116 Peaks Marker positioning iseina apni men 117 Next ad SO KOV cisci e eniro ec a NEN ABATER 117 Performing 3G FDD measurement ssssssseseee 119 Phase Rotation between channels sssssssssss 87 Phase Error vs Chip Evaluation cit ekle reps og ed can 24 Trace results ntn tatio aiaiai 207 Pilot bits INUIMDOF O RESTE 15 jqenpcm M 14 Power Channel Meas example sessss 229 Channels Displayed Inactive charinels 1 nacer rn nasterii 14 aem E 110 Time COM AIN ronori iniaa nsa 931 Power vs Slot Evaluation i ec t mir a 25 Trace results 5 io nacta tai cec ca etnia nesting coats 207 Power vs Symbol JS IUe 26 Trace results cio caen tatc scutis naso dora 207 Power vs Time Programming example cenae ernannt 236 Trace results nsa ta taire th snas dcc 207 Preamplifier Setting Softkey Presetting Channels a PretiggET ipe M Probes MICFODULtOEI 1 5 tert etie ttd teneas 63 i r rM 62 Programming examples Composite EVM 234 Incorrect scrambling code 2 232 PCDE ister Oita 20235 Power vs Time 236 Reference frequ
245. on AU TO raton ttr ne rnnt re Ene er e eM RW ERE e YE aH Fev X XT e geh INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet INPUT GON ING CUO m INPULGOUPIING C INPutDIGQ CDEVICE e ES INPUt DIQ RANGE COUPIO caram INPuEDIQ RANGSEUPBer ec ttt n ron c rete eh e center plebe ne YR Pod de INPut DIQ RANGS UPPer E AUTO cirea tei eec ia tt Eo etr rn e Ere staan ais INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT NPU DIQ SRAT m INPut DIQ S RATO AUTO rici teer Ere ERO ro reet ied ge i Era deanna MTU dm INPO EAT oe hmy du HE Dp E M INPUEBEATTIS TANT coe recreate cence cscs atc nae ec epas DURUM UE E en ta one UL di esM dI ee tei EIEd INPut FILTer HPASs STATe INPut EIEEer YIGES TATS etit tte n vada ee O e i ava redes Pe Yea FERE ERE ERROR INPUEGAINESTEATSS auris eene ie D M ce gc LEE IUD UTI EM UEM NIAI UETE INPUuEGAIN VALU seventeen etre eee tette c tpe reor tre E e Red B ev Foto RE INPut IMPedance 2 d sinite BALancedi STA Tel creates INPutIGQ FULESCale AUTO rore n tetro re et eaa a n oc te c t d odd cade INPut IQ FULLscale L EVel ione rrt nhi rne prete rtr tn NEVENU three repens Isdem
246. on DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t STATe eese enne nennen nenne nennen nennen DISPlayEWINBOWStis ZOOM AREA tuc ette tte eet tet dene toa gute end det p e e ATA d DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA eesseesseeeeeeeeeeneenneneee nennen esent nnne DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom STATe esses nene nennen nnne rennen DISPlayEWINDowWsns ZOOM S FATO cotto erunt esce Pete croce sie t ER EO td e Rte FORMatDEXPort DSEParaltor rrr t eren irren En Fee Fe EAR BER CER PENINE ANAA EEVEE FORMat DATA ee INiTiatesn gt ol c dug cssc CONTINUOUS c INimatesn gt REFRESH oct cay cs co reete eopeedeen repere eet wean cues EAEE casueay KK AEE E OE EEE pK TE OVE EORR INI Tiatesn SEQuerncer ABORL ertt Perret eH n e npn e EE Re de MENTRE Red INITiatesns SEQuencer IMMedlia te cor enr tex rrt enne n tni e Erection INITiatesn z SEQuerncer MODE iernare riran eee euros ra eae ttg ora Pee ou EH peat ea ET err EE LIN YR RE tex ERN Ee was INITiatesn SEQuencerREFResh ALL ntn ret a ren tne INITiate n EIMMediate err rtr rere rr Rene rtr eroe renean INPUEAT Tena scene tror iR costeve cacy IR TR tere Y ee pev pe tEE esae CRX e He EET SCHO EcL PESE ERU E ES DIEN DXTIMENS TELE DUE E HX FUMUS ERE INPut AT Ten ati
247. on page 149 Frontend Settings Frequency amplitude and y axis scaling settings represent the frontend of the mea surement setup e Amplitude Song n cr cer ree de eee ru bat rta e ce n educa 70 e Amplitude Settings for Analog Baseband Input seseesss 73 LES cios 75 e Etequeney SOUS 5 cere tior t e ence redet d eda den ed dece bague dtc os 76 6 2 3 1 Code Domain Analysis Amplitude Settings Amplitude settings determine how the R amp S FSW must process or display the expected input power levels Amplitude settings for input from the optional Analog Baseband interface are described in chapter 6 2 3 2 Amplitude Settings for Analog Baseband Input on page 73 To configure the amplitude settings Amplitude settings can be configured via the AMPT key or in the Amplitude dialog box gt To display the Amplitude dialog box do one of the following e Select Input Frontend from the Overview and then switch to the Amplitude tab e Select the AMPT key and then the Amplitude Config softkey Amplitude Reference Level Input Settings Value 0 9 dom Preamplifier Offset 0 0 dB Input Coupling Unit r R Impedance Mechanical Attenuation Electronic Attenuation State 0 Mode Mode Auto Value Using Electronic AMemMUat OM cs codicc deride nn e ia eec Mande e e dd e eret rts 72 lysis uo 72 az 01 BORNE 73 Reference
248. only DRHO RHO for the DwPTS slot BTS mode only DERM EVM RMS for the DwPTS slot BTS mode only DEPK EVM Peak for the DwPTS slot BTS mode only EVMPeak Returns the maximum Error Vector Magnitude of the selected channel EVMRMS Returns the average Error Vector Magnitude of the selected channel IQIMbalance Returns the IQ Imbalance in 96 IQOFfset Returns the IQ Offset in 96 MACCuracy Returns the Composite EVM in 96 PCDerror Returns the Peak Code Domain Error dB PD1 Returns the power of the slot s data part 1 in dBm PD2 Returns the power of the slot s data part 2 in dBm PDATa Returns the average power of the data parts in dBm PMIDamble Example Usage Manual operation Retrieving Results Returns the power of the midamble in dBm RHO Returns the parameter Rho SFACtor Returns the spreading factor of the channel SFRame Subframe number SLOT Returns the currently analyzed slot number SRATe Returns the symbol rate in ksps Note that TFRame returns a 9 if the trigger is at Free Run TFRame Returns the Trigger to Frame time in seconds UACTive Indicates whether UpPTS slot is active UE mode only UPOWer Power in the UpPTS slot UE mode only URHO RHO for the UpPTS slot UE mode only UERM EVM RMS for the UpPTS slot UE mode only UEPK EVM Peak for the UpPTS slot UE mode only CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES CERR Returns the Chip Rate Error Quer
249. only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 193 Suffix lt sb gt 1 2 3 4 5 Sub block in a Multi standard radio measurement MSR ACLR 1 to 5 Multi SEM 1 to 3 for all other measurements irrelevant Retrieving Results Query parameters Measurement ACPower MCACpower ACLR measurements also known as adjacent channel power or multicarrier adjacent channel measurements Returns the power for every active transmission and adjacent channel The order is power of the transmission channels power of adjacent channel lower upper power of alternate channels lower upper MSR ACLR results For MSR ACLR measurements the order of the returned results is slightly different power of the transmission channels total power of the transmission channels for each sub block power of adjacent channels lower upper power of alternate channels lower upper power of gap channels lower1 upper1 lower2 upper2 The unit of the return values depends on the scaling of the y axis logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit linear scaling returns the power in W GACLr For MSR ACLR measurements only returns a list of ACLR val ues for each gap channel lower1 upper1 lower2 upper2 MACM For MSR ACLR measurements only returns a list of CACLR val ues for each gap channel lower1 upper1 lower2 upper2 CN Carrier to noise measurements Returns the C N r
250. onnected Instrument on page 67 10 5 1 3 Configuring Input via the Optional Analog Baseband Interface The following commands are required to control the optional Analog Baseband Inter face in a remote environment They are only available if this option is installed For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface see the R amp S FSW I Q Ana lyzer User Manual Useful commands for Analog Baseband data described elsewhere INP SEL AIQ see INPut SELect on page 138 SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 149 Commands for the Analog Baseband calibration signal are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote commands exclusive to Analog Baseband data input and output INPutiQ BALancedE STATES uiro no o RE e oa E REN SEU TEAREN 143 INPut Q FULLSCAe yo 144 INPut IQ F LLscale EEVel ninan aa ceo evt 144 INPutlO TYPE ier coner rt eo Ey ERES a ex ua oue eer Y Re eee epa eee med rne rne re Rer quee ERER 144 CALibration AI Q HATIming 9 FAT 2 1 ctia tz t rte o ruth rptu pace tapa e en nee 145 INPut IQ BALanced STATe State This command defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all 4 Analog Baseband connectors or as a plain I Q signal via 2 single ended lines Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameters State ON Differential OFF Single ended RST ON Example INP IQ BAL OFF Manual operation See Input Configuration on page 61 INPut IQ FUL
251. or on rear panel Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 35V RST 1 4V Example TRIG LEV 2V Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 80 Configuring Code Domain Analysis TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe Type For external and time domain trigger sources you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Parameters Type POSitive NEGative POSitive Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level rising edge NEGative Triggers when the signal drops to the trigger level falling edge RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 81 TRIGger SEQuence SOURce Source This command selects the trigger source Note on external triggers If a measurement is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control program remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can continue Make sure this situation is avoided in your remote control programs Parameters Source Example Configuring Code Domain Analysis IMMediate Free Run EXTernal Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector EXT2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input EXT3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input RFPower Firs
252. ower For details on probes see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual Remote command INPut IQ FULLscale AUTO on page 144 INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel on page 144 6 2 3 3 Y Axis Scaling The vertical axis scaling is configurable In Code Domain Analysis the y axis usually displays the measured power levels Amplitude Scale ACEALL 0 0 dB LA Iuli 70 0 dB Auto Scale Once Restore Scale STZ 1 Code Domain Power Y Maxim m Y MIDIOMETL ies cort na rin e cnn rae Ya Sr ean a a EAEE 76 Auto Scale OMC ranirea a teet eve tete a etaed e E e e did 76 Restore Scale WINdOW ies oL reci o ee dte dr cd eiie denies 76 Code Domain Analysis Y Maximum Y Minimum Defines the amplitude range to be displayed on the y axis of the evaluation diagrams Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXimum on page 151 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum on page 152 Auto Scale Once Automatically determines the optimal range and reference level position to be dis played for the current measurement settings The display is only set once it is not adapted further if the measurement settings are changed again Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 151 Restore Scale Window Restores the default scale settings in the currently selected window 6 2 3 4 Frequency Settings Frequency settings for th
253. p S FSW application that processes I Q data to an external device The configuration settings for digital I Q output can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key or in the Outputs dialog box These settings are only available if the Digital Baseband Interface option is installed on the R amp S FSW As of firmware version 2 10 digital 1 Q output is also available with bandwidth exten sion option R amp S FSW B500 However see the note regarding digital I Q output and the B500 option in the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and l Q Input User Manual R amp S9FSW K76 K77 Configuration Output Meas Time 31 28i us SRate 2 Mo Output Digital IQ Digital Baseband Output Output Settings Max Sample Rate 100 MHz Sample Rate 32 MHz Full Scale Level 0 dBm Instrument Device Name SMBV100A Serial Number 257374 Port Name Dig BB In For details on digital I Q output see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer User Manual Digital Baseband UID ctt e ttr ten tre e etn hs aa aA 66 Output Settings Information reiecit n erret t reed eevee 66 Connected Instramielit seccina ERES RE EEXRRR a Seek astute ek ak ens uua eu qRuRSe 67 Digital Baseband Output Enables or disables a digital output stream to the optional Digital Baseband Interface if available Note If digital baseband output is active the sample rate is restricted to 200 MHz max 160 MHz bandwidth The only data source that can be used for digital baseband output is RF input
254. p width of 1 dB This setting is available for frequency and time domain measurements only Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 158 Trigger Holdoff Trigger Source Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored This softkey is available for frequency and time domain measurements only Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 157 Capture Offset Trigger Source This setting is only available for applications in MSRA operating mode It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements it defines the time offset between the capture buffer start and the start of the extracted application data In MSRA mode the offset must be a positive value as the capture buffer starts at the trigger time 0 Remote command SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet on page 224 Code Domain Analysis Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW No further trigger parameters are available for the connector
255. pe rete bert rer rcs MSR ACLR Results remote nr tete 210 MSRA Analysis interval sssrini Operating mode RF measurements MSRA applications Capture offset Capture offset remote MSRA Master Data Coverage liriese asiani 46 Multiple Measurement channels sesssssssss 10 50 Multiple zoom N Next Minim siib eei pne edges Marker positioning m Next Peak qu Marker POSITIONING ccn rro tct te trenes Noise SOUE E enni T 64 O OBW Configuration TD SCDMA s 105 TD SCDMA results 2 incre rne 35 Occupied bandwidth SEO OBW nissin aa 35 Offset Analysis interval Frequency Reference level TUNG er Options Electronic attenuation sisisi 72 High pass filter us PreambplifiBr rne eir rete Output Configuration Configuration remote 148 Digital Baseband Interface settings Digital Baseband Interface status ds Digital I Q remote ws 142 Noise source 64 Iu 63 Eam 64 82 Overload RF input remote i ti reae tds 135 Overview Configuration TD SCDMA eee 53 P PCDE EVG IU ATION deio ri Programming example Tface results ccavasves annida sanat cde cease Troubleshoot gereen innata nor et cid Peak Code D
256. pe Mask in ns Avg Average power measured in mask interval Max Maximum power measured in mask interval Time MaxPower The exact point in time when the maximum power occured For details see chapter 6 3 1 Power vs Time on page 98 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH LEV see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 183 Result Summary Result summaries provide the results of specific measurement functions in a table for numerical evaluation The contents of the result summary vary depending on the selected measurement function See the description of the individual measurement functions for details SSS eae User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 38 R amp S FSW K76 K77 Measurements and Result Display 2 Result Summary Channel Bandwidth Offset Power 1 229 MHz 0 86 dBm 0 86 dBm ower pper 79 59 dB 80 34 dB 85 04 dB 83 85 dB Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH RSUM see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 183 Marker Table Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers This table may be displayed automatically if configured accordingly see Marker Table Display on page 115 4 Marker Table Wnd Type X value 1 Mi 13 25 GHz 1 M 600 0 kHz 1 M1 600 0 kHz 1 T M 2 0 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 183 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 215 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 212 Marker Peak List The
257. quency Defines the center frequency for analog baseband input For real type baseband input I or Q only the center frequency is always 0 Hz Note If the analysis bandwidth to either side of the defined center frequency exceeds the minimum frequency 0 Hz or the maximum frequency 40 MHz 80 MHz an error is displayed In this case adjust the center frequency or the analysis bandwidth Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 149 Probe Settings Probes are configured in a separate tab on the Input dialog box which is displayed when you select the INPUT OUTPUT key and then Input Source Config inpet M 0 00 dBm Freq 13 25 GHz Channel 32 Code Power Relative Subtype 0 1 ud Att 10dB Slot 0of3 ChannelType PILOT bd m Input Source Probes Probe I Probe Q Name RT ZD10 Serial Number 201241 Part Number 1410 4715 02 Not C cted Type Differential ot Connecte Common Mode Offset 0 0 v Common Settings For each possible probe connector Baseband Input Baseband Input Q the detec ted type of probe if any is displayed The following information is provided for each connected probe Probe name e Serial number e R amp S part number e Type of probe Differential Single Ended 6 2 2 2 Code Domain Analysis For more information on using probes with an R amp S FSW see the R amp S FSW User Manual For general information on the R amp S9RTO probes see the device manuals Com
258. r 1QLength command before using this command Parameters lt SlotNumber gt lt numeric value gt Range 0 to Number of slots to capture 1 Increment 1 RST 0 Example SENS CDP SLOT 3 Manual operation See Slot Number on page 109 10 5 10 Code Domain Analysis Settings Some evaluations provide further settings for the results CONFigure CDPower CTABle ORDer ssssseseseseseseeserere hte nnne enn nn nnns nnn unnur nnne 177 SENSeJTODPOWePNORMallzg ideae tta ttr ra pe tae obtu eta g et ve ert Lax re ea deter e 178 SBENSe ICDPowet PDISplay deca eoa ce rte co ide dae tota oy aaaea i anona Aai Dua 178 Idus Brel i c pc EE 178 CONFigure CDPower CTABle ORDer CODE MiDamble gt This command selects sorting of the channel table in code order or midamble order Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameters CODE MIDamble gt CODE Channels are sorted in code order MiDamble Channels are sorted in midamble order RST CODE Example CONF CDP CTAB ORD Sorts the channels in code order Manual operation See Channel Table Sort Order on page 110 SENSe CDPower NORMalize lt State gt If enabled the I Q offset is eliminated from the measured signal This is useful to deduct a DC offset to the baseband caused by the DUT thus improving the EVM Note however that for EVM measurements according to standard compensation must be disabled Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF
259. r Spectrum2 SYST PRES CHAN EXEC Restores the factory default settings to the Spectrum2 channel Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Channel on page 54 Selecting a Measurement The following commands are required to define the measurement type in a remote environment For details on available measurements see chapter 3 Measurements and Result Display on page 13 CONFigure CDPower MEASurement sse neret entente nennen 133 CONFigure CDPower MEASurement Measurement This command selects the measurement type for the TD SCDMA BTS application Configuring Code Domain Analysis For details on these measurements see chapter 3 2 Frequency and Time Domain Measurements on page 30 Parameters Measurement ACLR Adjacent Channel Power CCDF Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CDPower Code Domain Power ESPectrum Spectrum Emission Mask OBWidth Occupied Bandwidth POWer Channel Power PVTime Power vs Time RST CDPower Example CONF CDP MEAS POW Selects Signal Channel Power measurement Manual operation See Power vs Time on page 31 See Power on page 32 See Ch Power ACLR on page 33 See Spectrum Emission Mask on page 34 See Occupied Bandwidth on page 35 See CCDF on page 36 See Creating a New Channel Table from the Measured Signal Measure Table on page 91 10 5 Configuring Code Domain Analysis The following commands are required to configure C
260. r use INP SEL AIQ see INPut SELect on page 138 Suffix lt p gt 1 2 3 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values State DETected NDETected RST NDETected Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup TYPE Queries the type of the probe Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values lt Type gt String containing one of the following values None no probe detected active differential active single ended Usage Query only Configuring the Outputs Configuring trigger input output is described in chapter 10 5 3 2 Configuring the Trig ger Output on page 161 DIAGHOSIIG SER Vice N SOURCE cx cx esae on eto c ade b i ede te ce re da Lade neca 149 Configuring Code Domain Analysis DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce State This command turns the 28 V supply of the BNC connector labeled NOISE SOURCE CONTROL on the R amp S FSW on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example DIAG SERV NSO ON Manual operation See Noise Source on page 64 10 5 2 Frontend Configuration The following commands configure frequency amplitude and y axis scaling settings which represent the
261. r Source on page 79 See Free Run on page 79 See External Trigger 1 2 3 on page 79 See Digital Q on page 79 See IF Power on page 80 10 5 3 2 Configuring the Trigger Output The following commands are required to send the trigger signal to one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FSW OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRGCtiON ccccccssesseecececeeseeeeeececeaseeeeeeseaeseeeeseauaseseesneaaeeeeeeees 161 OUTPULTRIGGErspori gt bEeVel ode iet rr aa tede quc etr ede a aeterne eee 161 OUTPuE TRIGgersport s OTYPO6e i c idervs cot paaia e EEN E Peu a bad ar sav FAM Qv eU NERA RUE 162 OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe IMMediate eeeeeeeeeeeeeeen eene nnne 162 OUTP ut TRlGgereponte PULSeLENOGLR 2 5 aatia ne eo too neam rr eher ee 162 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection Direction This command selects the trigger direction for trigger ports that serve as an input as well as an output Suffix port Selects the used trigger port 2 trigger port 2 front panel 3 trigger port 3 rear panel Parameters Direction INPut Port works as an input OUTPut Port works as an output RST INPut Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 64 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel Level This command defines the level of the signal generated at the trigger output This command works only if you have selected a user defined output wi
262. r ee ree eee ee ee 88 Using Predefined Channel Tables er rer ee ees 89 Inactive Channel Threshold Defines the minimum power that a single channel must have compared to the total sig nal in order to be recognized as an active channel Remote command SENSe CDPower ICTReshold on page 168 Max Modulation Defines the highest modulation to be considered in the automatic channel search In low SNR environments it may be necessary to limit the channel search to lower modu lations than 64QAM The following types are available 6 2 8 2 Code Domain Analysis QPSK 8PSK 16QAM 64QAM Remote command SENSe CDPower MMAX on page 168 Using Predefined Channel Tables Defines the channel search mode Predefined Compares the input signal to the predefined channel table selected in the Predefined Tables list Autosearch Detects channels automatically on the basis of the active predefined channel table Remote command CONFigure CDPower CTABle STATe on page 170 Channel Table Management Channel tables are managed in the Channel Detection dialog box which is displayed when you select the Channel Detection button in the configuration Overview Predefined Tables ccccccscccceseeceeseeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeneeecaaaeegeeaeecesaeseeaeeeseaeseeaeeeseeieeseaaeeees 89 Selectingd TADE e as eet eter ettet td dee tuna dace 89 Creating a New Table iieri uctor eres dates eni certe E ced reb ene 89 Eding a Table
263. r vs Slot evaluation displays the power of the selected channel for each slot The power is displayed either absolute or relative to the total power of the data parts of the signal The measurement evaluates a single channel over all slots User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 25 R amp S FSW K76 K77 Measurements and Result Display 2Channel Power vs Slot 1 Slot Fig 3 9 Power vs Slot Display for TD SCDMA BTS measurements The slots are displayed according to the detected channels using the following colors yellow active channel e green channel with alias power power results from channels with a different code class e cyan inactive channel e red selected channel if a channel is made up of more than one code all codes that belong to the channel are red Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PSLot see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 183 TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 201 Power vs Symbol The Power vs Symbol evaluation shows the power measured for each symbol in the selected channel and the selected slot The power is not averaged here Power vs Symbol Symb 0 5 5 Symb Symb 43 Fig 3 10 Power vs Symbol display for TD SCDMA BTS measurements User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 26 R amp S FSW K76 K77 Measurements and Result Display Depending on the spreading factor symbol rate of the channel a slot may contain a minimum of 44 and a maximum of 704 symbols see table 4 8 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH
264. re all channels are listed below the midamble they belong to 2 Channel Table 1 Cirw Channel SymRate a Power MA AMIOT AMID Type ksps ai dBm shift dB dB Fig 3 2 Channel Table display for TD SCDMA BTS measurements By default only active channels are included in the display to include inactive chan nels see Channel Table Configuration on page 18 Inactive channels are marked with dashes in the Channel Type SymRate and Modulation columns For details on the displayed results see table 3 2 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CTABle see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 183 TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 201 User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 17 Code Domain Analysis Channel Table Configuration Channel Table You can configure which parameters are displayed in the Channel Table by selecting the table header A Table Configuration dialog box is displayed in which you can select the columns to be displayed E Columns to be displayed Channel Type Power dB Symbol Rate Mid1 Modulation Mid2 Power dBm Show Inactive Channels By default only active channels are displayed In order to display all channels includ ing the inactive ones enable the Show Inactive Channels option For details on the displayed results see table 3 2 Code Domain Power The Code Domain Power evaluation shows the power of all possible codes in the selected slot in the total signal Since channel
265. re i Rd ERA ERR 116 Markers Individual Marker Settings In CDA evaluations up to 4 markers can be activated in each diagram at any time Analysis Markers Marker Settings Search Range Selected State Stimulus Code Domain Marker All Marker Off Selected Marker teet i eee tet rbi te dde ete Y bad x Ee tds 113 UID TT SII CREE DOCE COLD LL LLL DS SEEN 113 PO M 114 WIERD e AE ENE T TT E E E E 114 Al Markers Officea ve t a Fe ee a aa e e o echa stadt tre edat 114 Selected Marker Marker name The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange Remote command Marker selected via suffix m in remote commands Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 214 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 215 Markers X value Defines the position of the marker on the x axis channel slot symbol depending on evaluation Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 216 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 215 Marker Type Toggles the marker type The type for marker 1 is always Normal the type for delta marker 1 is always Delta These types cannot be changed Note If normal marker 1 is the active marker switching the Mkr Type activates an additional delta marker 1 For any other marker switching the marker
266. rene rnm ence n Lh rhe hec ta re Fear dS Fe AERE FEE EE ERROR 228 SENS GCDPOWErRMMAX 168 SENSe GDPowerAMSHIIfE ooa a a de ed D tp ed eve cu raed ane DU REPE cWe NU 165 SENSe CDPower NORM8allze 2 rin enter hh ether dr eR En SERE ANEA PETATE rre ATENTE 178 SENSe CDPower PDISpl y 2 1 oer eret tatto ken bt nene er re beh rrr erbe gui dos dee Ex ERR eee 178 SENSe CDPower PTS SENSe CDPower QINVert SENS CDPoWer SCODG cett rtr ene t nr reet tre ca Re be HEAR ERE RC EE XU a Teese FRATER aides ISENS JCDPOWE cle SENSe CDPower SET C OUNL curet rhe hr neta rt tre E SAVENA i RA n ae ka Ye y KE CUN TES EENEN SENSE CDPOoWer SLOT PS SENSe GDPower S T SLO tics ti a tia bes ELE ccaadtantteneea aeeendte SENSe CDPower STSLot MODE SENSe GDPower STSLEotROdTalte noter nre trt pe eh rn thenp pend Ra Pene Fee a gn Shea aT 167 SENSE eiblejm lU noces EEUU 167 SENSe IGDPOWet TREP rite tener perque ete cor ena india ll EATEN platens inet 167 SENS FREQUlenCy CENTE iihi ub er e tio etri eR ache Rt etu t Peut eL Env ded tuae 149 SENSe FREQUuency CEN Ten STE is reor thats xt oc i esse oca vas beca een Hen OECD CI RS T UN 150 SENSe FREQuency GENTer STEP AUTO sicaris erca treten kh nin erre ern E Ferran 150 SENSe FREQuency OFFSet SENSe IMSRA CAR Ture OFF Se bic aor hes Eo a na esie i coe ex DX anita dinate Cin casim ieee aang a 224 SENSe POWer ACHannel AUTO LTIMa
267. rerequisites and restrictions apply for high accuracy timing To obtain this high timing precision trigger port 1 and port 2 must be connected via the Cable for High Accuracy Timing order number 1325 3777 00 e As trigger port 1 and port 2 are connected via the cable only trigger port 3 can be used to trigger a measurement Trigger port 2 is configured as output if the high accuracy timing option is active Make sure not to activate this option if you use trigger port 2 in your measurement setup e When you first enable this setting you are prompted to connect the cable for high accuracy timing to trigger ports 1 and 2 If you cancel this prompt the setting remains disabled As soon as you confirm this prompt the cable must be in place the firmware does not check the connection In remote operation the setting is activated without a prompt For more information see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual Remote command CALibration AIQ HATiming STATe on page 145 Center Frequency Defines the center frequency for analog baseband input For real type baseband input I or Q only the center frequency is always 0 Hz Note If the analysis bandwidth to either side of the defined center frequency exceeds the minimum frequency 0 Hz or the maximum frequency 40 MHz 80 MHz an error is displayed In this case adjust the center frequency or the analysis bandwidth Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer
268. rface is installed Parameters Level numeric value Range 1 UV to 7 071 V RST 1V Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 59 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT Unit Defines the unit of the full scale level see Full Scale Level on page 59 The availa bility of units depends on the measurement application you are using This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters Level VOLT DBM DBPW WATT DBMV DBUV DBUA AMPere RST Volt Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 59 INPut DIQ SRATe lt SampleRate gt This command specifies or queries the sample rate of the input signal from the optional Digital Baseband Interface see Input Sample Rate on page 58 Parameters lt SampleRate gt Range 1 Hz to 10 GHz RST 32 MHz Example INP DIQ SRAT 200 MHz Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 58 INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO lt State gt If enabled the sample rate of the digital I Q input signal is set automatically by the con nected device This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 58 Configuring Code Domain Analysis OUTPut DIQ State This command turns continuous output of I Q data to the optional Digital Baseband Interface on and off Using the digital input and di
269. ronization errors for code domain measurements This mea surement result is also valid if the application could not synchronize to the TD SCDMA signal Trigger to Frame The time difference between the beginning of the recorded signal section to the start of the first slot For triggered measurements this difference is identical with the time difference of frame trigger trigger offset and the start of the first slot If synchronization of the analyzer and input signal fails the value of Trigger to Frame is not significant For non triggered measurements no result is available P Data Average power of the slot s data parts total and for each data part P Midamble Power of the slot s midamble Carrier Freq Error The frequency error relative to the center frequency of the analyzer The absolute fre quency error is the sum of the analyzer and DUT frequency error The specified value is averaged for one slot see also Synchronization fails on page 118 IQ Offset DC offset of the signal in the selected slot in 96 IQ Imbalance 1 Q imbalance of signals in the selected slot in 96 Active Channels The number of active channels detected in the signal in the selected slot Both the detected data channels and the control channels are considered active channels RHO Quality parameter RHO for each slot According to the TD SCDMA standard Rho is the normalized correlated power between the measured and the ideal
270. rrently used analysis interval in seconds related to capture buffer start is indicated in the window header for each result display For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual 3 2 Frequency and Time Domain Measurements In addition to the Code Domain Analysis measurements the TD SCDMA applications also provide some frequency and time domain measurements as defined in the TD SCDMA standard Frequency and time domain measurements are identical to the cor responding measurements in the base unit but configured according to the require ments of the TD SCDMA standard For details on these measurements see the R amp S FSW User Manual MSRA operating mode Frequency and time domain measurements are not available in MSRA operating mode For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual 3 2 1 Measurement Types and Results in the Frequency and Time Domain The TD SCDMA applications provide the following frequency and time domain mea surements FOX VERDE rtr riviera cert ER Uv ere repro rede 31 CIPIT A 32 exis AGUR MM 33 specum Emission MaSK zororo tercie tide eno p eene nerve tne ere hee ea aaa reete 34 Occupied Bandwidth P M TIER 35 Gp c 36 User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 30 R amp S FSW K76 K77 Measurements and Result Display Power vs Time The Power vs Time measurement checks t
271. s a fixed step size for the center frequency Enter the step size in the Value field Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 150 Frequency Offset Shifts the displayed frequency range along the x axis by the defined offset This parameter has no effect on the instrument s hardware or on the captured data or on data processing It is simply a manipulation of the final results in which absolute fre quency values are displayed Thus the x axis of a spectrum display is shifted by a constant offset if it shows absolute frequencies but not if it shows frequencies relative to the signal s center frequency A frequency offset can be used to correct the display of a signal that is slightly distorted by the measurement setup for example The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is O Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 150 6 2 4 Trigger Settings Trigger settings determine when the input signal is measured Trigger settings can be configured via the TRIG key or in the Trigger dialog box which is displayed when you select the Trigger button in the Overview Code Domain Analysis Lla Ext Trigger 1 Trigger Level M sactitsdi 0 0 s Slope External triggers from one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FSW are configured in a separate tab of the dialog box Trigger Source Trigger In Out Trigger 2 Output Output Type User Def
272. s several files into a single tar archive file Files in tar format can be unpacked using standard archive tools see http en wikipedia org wiki Comparison of file archivers available for most operating systems The advantage of tar files is that the archived files inside the tar file are not changed not com pressed and thus it is possible to read the I Q data directly within the archive without the need to unpack untar the tar file first Contained files An iq tar file must contain the following files e Q parameter XML file e g xyz xml Contains meta information about the I Q data e g sample rate The filename can be defined freely but there must be only one single I Q parameter XML file inside an ig tar file e Q data binary file e g xyz complex f10oat32 Contains the binary I Q data of all channels There must be only one single I Q data binary file inside an iq tar file Optionally an iq tar file can contain the following file Q preview XSLT file e g open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt Contains a stylesheet to display the I Q parameter XML file and a preview of the l Q data in a web browser A sample stylesheet is available at http www rohde schwarz com file open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt I Q Parameter XML File Specification The content of the I Q parameter XML file must comply with the XML schema RsIqTar xsd available at http www rohde schwarz comf file RsIqTar xsd
273. se 77 External remote eese enean ttn nb ae 159 Holdoff oiid 81 Hysteresis 2091 ES EE 81 Output ence 64 82 Programming example 2 ern tnter tenis 234 lec e 81 159 Uic ct 14 Trigger level 80 External trigger remote 158 Trigger SOUFCB x ioco itis ext tita ena netten nen rx e TY Digital 1 Q 79 External i9 Free RUN Pe 79 lue aE 80 Troubleshooting INPUT OVEROAG ue nette bec mte erbe 135 U UE User equipment arnser teretes 9 Units Reference level ssssssssssseeeeens 70 74 Updating FRESUIEGISDIAY rre retirer 94 Result display remote sssssss 223 Upper Level Fysteresis 5 3 e tme 96 UpPTS Basics Results User manuals Ww WCDMA 9 Window title bar information seeeeesees 11 Windows Adding remote ce ettet aana 183 Closing remote 185 188 Configuring 94 100 Layout remote titre entr tact e teen 186 Maximizing remote x 182 Querying remote eee 185 Replacing remote iieri 186 Splitting remote T Types remote ettet t deaa X X value Matike esasan a tee dede REE 114 Y Y maximum Y minimum Ie me 76 YIG preselector Activating Dea
274. select an adequate channel threshold Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PCDerror see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 183 TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 201 Phase Error vs Chip Phase Error vs Chip activates the phase error versus chip display The phase error is displayed for all chips of the slected slot The phase error is calculated by the difference of the phase of received signal and phase of reference signal The reference signal is estimated from the channel configu ration of all active channels The phase error is given in degrees in a range of 180 to 180 User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 24 R amp S FSW K76 K77 Measurements and Result Display CHIP MAGNITUDE CHIP EVM X Recdived JC Reference Chip P I 74 i N CH P PHASE RROR i i I i i Ij r i i l I H i I I i i I i I i T i I I i T Fig 3 8 Calculating the magnitude phase and vector error per chip PHI as ax N 2560 ke 0 N 1 where PHI phase error of chip number k Sk complex chip value of received signal Xk complex chip value of reference signal k index number of the evaluated chip N number of chips at each CPICH slot x phase calculation of a complex value 1 Phase Error vs Chip Chip 2559 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PECHip see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 183 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 Power vs Slot The Powe
275. signing midambles to code channels are available default midamble assignment Specific midambles are assigned to each channelization code according to a standard specific rule user specific midamble assignment Each code channel is assigned an individual midamble code higher communica tion layers must determine which midamble belongs to which channelization code common midamble assignment All code channels share a common midamble R amp SSFSW K76 K77 Measurement Basics pa S U P o pev The midamble to be inserted between the data fields in a slot is generated by superim posing the individual midambles of the codes The TD SCDMA specifications require that the power of the midamble and the power of the data fields for a single slot must be identical When using the default midamble assignment this means that each individual midamble is transmitted with the same power as its assigned channelization code For common midamble assignment this means the single midamble is transmitted with the same power as the data fields For user specific assignment the individual midambles are not known at this stage The parameters AMid1 2 in the Channel Table results show the power offset of the midamble to the data fields 1 or 2 for each channel see table 3 2 4 5 CDA Measurements in MSRA Operating Mode
276. sion is indicated on the title page of the release notes The most recent release notes are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html gt Downloads gt Firmware 1 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation 1 3 1 Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as ments dialog boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota tion marks Conventions Used in the Documentation 1 3 2 Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the instrument several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task In this case the procedure using the touchscreen is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using th
277. special conditions and restrictions for the YIG filter described in YIG Prese lector on page 57 Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 0 for I Q Analyzer GSM VSA and MC Group Delay measurements Example INP FILT YIG OFF Deactivates the YIG preselector Manual operation See YIG Preselector on page 57 INPut IMPedance Impedance This command selects the nominal input impedance of the RF input In some applica tions only 50 O are supported 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a matching pad of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The power loss correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 The command is not available for measurements with the optional Digital Baseband Interface Parameters Impedance 50 75 RST 500 Example INP IMP 75 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Impedance on page 56 10 5 1 2 Configuring Code Domain Analysis INPut SELect Source This command selects the signal source for measurements i e it defines which con nector is used to input data to the R amp S FSW If no additional input options are installed only RF input is supported Parameters Source RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector DIQ Digital IQ data only available with optional Digital Baseband Interface For details on I Q input see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer User Man
278. stances of an object In that case the suffix selects a particular instance e g a mea surement window Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets n next to the keyword If you don t quote a suffix for keywords that support one a 1 is assumed Example DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe enables the zoom in a particular mea surement window selected by the suffix at WINDow DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON refers to window 4 10 1 4 Optional Keywords Some keywords are optional and are only part of the syntax because of SCPI compli ance You can include them in the header or not Note that if an optional keyword has a numeric suffix and you need to use the suffix you have to include the optional keyword Otherwise the suffix of the missing keyword is assumed to be the value 1 Optional keywords are emphasized with square brackets Example Without a numeric suffix in the optional keyword SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as FREQuency CENTer With a numeric suffix in the optional keyword DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe DISPlay ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 1 no suffix DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 4 Introduction 10 1 5 Alternative Keywords A vertical stroke indicates alternatives for a specific keyword You can use both key words to the same effect Example SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution In the short for
279. strument s firmware It offers quick context sen sitive access to the complete information needed for operation and programming Online help is available using the icon on the toolbar of the R amp S FSW Web Help The web help provides online access to the complete information on operating the R amp S FSW and all available options without downloading The content of the web help corresponds to the user manuals for the latest product version The web help is availa ble from the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html Downloads Web Help Getting Started This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the CD ROM It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instrument Basic operations and handling are described Safety information is also included The Getting Started manual in various languages is also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html User Manuals User manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional firmware application The user manuals are available in PDF format in printable form on the Documenta tion CD ROM delivered with the instrument In the user manuals all instrument func tions are described in detail Furthermore they provide a complete description of the remote control commands with programmi
280. sured data is analyzed and displayed on the screen In TD SCDMA applications only one trace per window can be configured for Code Domain Analysis DISPlayWINDowens E TRACSSESMOD E diia tet cedet ertet eret ete 213 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STAT 2 2 0 0ccceccsccaececeeeeneseneeesecneeeeenasnecaasasaseseneeeae 214 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE Mode This command selects the trace mode In case of max hold min hold or average trace mode you can set the number of single measurements with SENSe SWEep COUNt Note that synchronization to the end of the measurement is possible only in single sweep mode 10 10 2 10 10 2 1 Analysis Example INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE WRIT Selects clear write mode for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the measure ment Manual operation See Trace Mode on page 112 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command turns a trace on and off The measurement continues in the background Parameters State ON OFF0 1 RST 1 for TRACe1 0 for TRACe 2 to 6 Example DISP TRAC3 ON Usage SCPI confirmed Markers Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram In TD SCDMA applications only 4 markers per window can be config ured for Code Doma
281. sweeps RUN SINGLE starts the Sequencer in single mode If the Sequencer is off only the evaluation for the currently displayed measurement channel is updated Remote command INITiate lt n gt IMMediate on page 193 Continue Single Sweep While the measurement is running the Continue Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 192 Refresh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated and only for MSRA applications The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged This is useful for example after evaluation changes have been made or if a new Sweep was performed from another application in this case only that application is updated automatically after data acquisition Note To update all active applications at once use the Refresh all function in the Sequencer menu Remote command INITiate lt n gt REFResh on page 223 Sweep Average Count Defines the number of measurements to be performed in the single sweep mode Val ues from 0 to 200000 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one measurement is performed 6 2 10 Code Domain Analysis The sweep count is applied to all the traces in all diagrams Remote command SENSe SWEep
282. t CONTinuous on page 193 Return values lt Result gt Result at the marker position Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker Table on page 23 See Marker Peak List on page 39 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics RESult lt t gt lt ResultType gt This command queries the results of a CCDF or ADP measurement for a specific trace lt n gt is irrelevant 10 10 10 10 1 Analysis Parameters lt ResultType gt MEAN Average RMS power in dBm measured during the measure ment time PEAK Peak power in dBm measured during the measurement time CFACtor Determined crest factor ratio of peak power to average power in dB ALL Results of all three measurements mentioned before separated by commas lt mean power gt lt peak power gt lt crest factor gt Example CALC STAT RES2 ALL Reads out the three measurement results of trace 2 Example of answer string 5 56 19 25 13 69 i e mean power 5 56 dBm peak power 19 25 dBm crest factor 13 69 dB Usage Query only Manual operation See CCDF on page 36 Analysis The following commands define general result analysis settings concerning the traces and markers HR cEEE 213 EMISIT 214 Traces The trace settings determine how the mea
283. t CONFigure DURation MODE is set to MANual Parameters Duration Numeric value in seconds Range 0 001 to 16000 0 RST 0 001 Default unit s Configuring Code Domain Analysis Example ADJ CONF DUR MODE MAN Selects manual definition of the measurement length ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5ms Length of the measurement is 5 ms Manual operation See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 96 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE Mode In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S FSW performs a measurement on the current input data This command selects the way the R amp S FSW determines the length of the measurement Parameters Mode AUTO The R amp S FSW determines the measurement length automati cally according to the current input data MANual The R amp S FSW uses the measurement length defined by SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 174 RST AUTO Manual operation See Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto on page 96 See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 96 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer Threshold When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 176 command the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setti
284. t DBIO BRANGe UPPE iiinis pad ntn Rr pend Frane abb EEA duca 141 NPU DIOC RANGE UPPE UNT oca ratto a enda tete dete 141 PU DIG SRA Tenana E E ERA 141 TPT DO SRA TSAUTO nlt 141 OUTP O cnca c 142 OUTPUE DIQ CDEV ie C 142 INPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital I Q input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface For details see the section Interface Status Information for the optional Digital Base band Interface in the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer User Manual Return values lt ConnState gt Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected lt DeviceName gt Device ID of the connected device lt SerialNumber gt Serial number of the connected device lt PortName gt Port name used by the connected device lt SampleRate gt Maximum or currently used sample rate of the connected device in Hz depends on the used connection protocol version indica ted by lt SampleRateType gt parameter lt MaxTransferRate gt Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz lt ConnProtState gt State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the connected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done Configuring Code Domain Analysis PRBSTestState State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt SampleRa
285. t for data that you send to the R amp S FSW The R amp S FSW automatically recognizes the data it receives regardless of the format Parameters lt Format gt ASCii ASCii format separated by commas This format is almost always suitable regardless of the actual data format However the data is not as compact as other for mats may be REAL 32 32 bit IEEE 754 floating point numbers in the definite length block format In the Spectrum application the format setting REAL is used for the binary transmission of trace data For I Q data 8 bytes per sample are returned for this format set ting RST ASCII Example FORM REAL 32 Usage SCPI confirmed Retrieving Results TRACe lt n gt DATA lt ResultType gt This command returns the trace data Depending on the evaluation the trace data for mat varies The data format depends on FORMat DATA For details see chapter 10 9 3 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt on page 204 Query parameters lt ResultType gt Selects the type of result to be returned TRACE1 TRACE4 Returns the trace data for the corresponding trace as a comma separated list of values This data consists of some or all of the result parameters described below depending on the result type For details see chapter 10 9 3 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt on page 204 LIST For CDA measurements Returns the results for t
286. t intermediate frequency Frequency and time domain measurements only Not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Inter face or the optional Analog Baseband Interface IFPower Second intermediate frequency For frequency and time domain measurements only Not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Inter face For input from the optional Analog Baseband Interface this parameter is interpreted as BBPower for compatibility reasons BBPower Baseband power for digital input via the optional Digital Base band Interface Baseband power for digital input via the optional Digital Base band Interface or the optional Analog Baseband interface UE mode K77 only PSEN External power sensor For frequency and time domain measurements only GPO GP1 GP2 GP3 GP4 GP5 For applications that process I Q data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications and only if the optional Digital Base band Interface is available Defines triggering of the measurement directly via the LVDS connector The parameter specifies which general purpose bit 0 to 5 will provide the trigger data The assignment of the general purpose bits used by the Digital IQ trigger to the LVDS connector pins is provided in Digital Q on page 79 RST IMMediate TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal Configuring Code Domain Analysis Manual operation See Trigge
287. ta Acquisition on page 83 5 Synchronization See chapter 6 2 7 Synchronization on page 85 6 Channel Detection See chapter 6 2 8 Channel Detection on page 87 7 Analysis See chapter 7 Analysis on page 108 8 Display Configuration See chapter 6 1 Result Display Configuration on page 50 To configure settings P Select any button in the Overview to open the corresponding dialog box Select a setting in the channel bar at the top of the measurement channel tab to change a specific setting Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand corner of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values Note that the PRESET key restores the entire instrument to its default values and thus closes all measurement channels on the R amp S FSW except for the default Spectrum application channel Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 133 Select Measurement Selects a different measurement to be performed See chapter 3 Measurements and Result Display on page 13 Specifics for The measurement channel may contain several windows for different results Thus the settings indicated in the Overview and configured in the dialog boxes vary depending on the selected window Select an active window from the Specifics for selection list that is displayed in the Overview and in all window specific configuration
288. teType gt 0 Maximum sample rate is displayed 1 Current sample rate is displayed lt FullScaleLevel gt The level in dBm that should correspond to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 if transferred from connected device If not available 1 4 QNAN not a number is returned Example INP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMW200A 101190 BBMM 1 OUT 100000000 200000000 Passed Passed 1 1 4QNAN Manual operation See Connected Instrument on page 59 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO State If enabled the digital input full scale level is automatically set to the value provided by the connected device if available This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband interface is installed Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 59 INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling State If enabled the reference level for digital input is adjusted to the full scale level automat ically if the full scale level changes This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level on page 59 Configuring Code Domain Analysis INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer Level Defines or queries the Full Scale Level i e the level that corresponds to an I Q sam ple with the magnitude 1 This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Inte
289. th OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameters Level HIGH TTL signal LOW OV RST LOW Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 64 See Level on page 65 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe lt OutputT ype gt This command selects the type of signal generated at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters lt OutputType gt DEVice Sends a trigger signal when the R amp S FSW has triggered inter nally TARMed Sends a trigger signal when the trigger is armed and ready for an external trigger event UDEFined Sends a user defined trigger signal For more information see OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel RST DEVice Manual operation See Output Type on page 65 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate This command generates a pulse at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Usage Event Manual operation See Send Trigger on page 65 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth lt Length gt This command defines the length of the pulse generated at the trigger output 10 5 4 Configuring Code Domain Analysis
290. thand corner of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values Note that the PRESET key restores the entire instrument to its default values and thus closes all measurement channels on the R amp S FSW except for the default Spectrum application channel Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 133 Select Measurement Selects a different measurement to be performed See chapter 3 Measurements and Result Display on page 13 Specifics for The measurement channel may contain several windows for different results Thus the settings indicated in the Overview and configured in the dialog boxes vary depending on the selected window Select an active window from the Specifics for selection list that is displayed in the Overview and in all window specific configuration dialog boxes The Overview and dialog boxes are updated to indicate the settings for the selected window PvT Measurement Settings The following settings and functions are specific to the Power vs Time measurement in the TD SCDMA applications They are available from the Power vs Time menu which is displayed when you press the MEAS CONFIG key SWICHING Point ar rite rre cepa Pad FT ER EE Do Le 24 Ea Heap uela EE EE Ede 100 Start MaS accainn e Ide eR BREUI R e TIR er eme REC e RR ren d Der ERR 101 INO Of SUDIFalTIGS ierra iere petere ERI Ere Federale o Eae adage bert ud pase
291. that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values e Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S FSW follow the SCPI syntax rules e Asynchronous commands A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next com mand starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous command e Reset values RST Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as RST values if available Default unit This is the unit used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the parame ter e Manual operation If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 125 Introduction 10 1 2 Long and Short Form The keywords have a long and a short form You can use either the long or the short form but no other abbreviations of the keywords The short form is emphasized in upper case letters Note however that this emphasis only serves the purpose to distinguish the short from the long form in the manual For the instrument the case does not matter Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as SENS FREQ CENT 10 1 3 Numeric Suffixes Some keywords have a numeric suffix if the command can be applied to multiple in
292. the channel is active other wise code 7 at spreading factor 16 Remote command SENSe CDPower CODE on page 176 Slot Number Selects the slot for evaluation This affects channel detection as well as the following evaluations see also chapter 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis on page 16 Bitstream Channel Table Code Domain Power Code Domain Error Power Result Summary Composite Constellation Power vs Symbol Result Summary Symbol Constellation Symbol EVM Remote command SENSe CDPower SLOT on page 177 Set to Analyze Selects a specific set for further analysis The value range depends on the Set Count and is between 0 and Set Count 1 Remote command SENSe CDPower SET on page 177 7 2 Code Domain Analysis Settings Some evaluations provide further settings for the results Code Domain Analysis Settings Code Domai in Settings T Code Domain Analyzer Common Compensate IQ Offset Code Domain Power Code Power Display Absolute LERGA Channel Table Settings Channel Table Sort Order Code DwPTS Analysis Show DwPTS Results Fig 7 1 Code Domain Settings BTS mode Compensate IQ Offset seessssssssssssssssseeenene nennen nennen nnne nnn sene 110 Gode Power DISplay eorr et e ertet ce tree cette ces cb ep ct e e c iene 110 Channel Table Sort OFIer ec reet ote pee e ete exte da nS 110 Show DwPTS Results BTS mode sss een
293. the default configuration The Code Domain Analyzer menu is displayed and provides access to the most important configuration functions The Span Bandwidth Lines and Marker Functions menus are not available for Code Domain Analysis in TD SCDMA applications Code Domain Analysis can be configured easily in the Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Overview softkey from any menu Code Domain Analysis Importing and Exporting I Q Data The I Q data to be evaluated for TD SCDMA measurements can not only be measured by the TD SCDMA applications themselves it can also be imported to the applications provided it has the correct format Furthermore the evaluated I Q data from the TD SCDMA applications can be exported for further analysis in external applications The import and export functions are available in the Save Recall menu which is dis played when you select the E Save or EJ Open icon in the toolbar For details on importing and exporting I Q data see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer User Manual 6 2 1 Configuration Overview eene nmren nennen nennen nns 53 6 2 2 Data Input and Output Settings eee enne 54 6 2 2 1 Input Source Settings sssssssssssssssssseeeeeeee nennen nnne nnne en 55 6 2 22 Output Settings orae eer Hte ede n e Ee Ra ua tanec aA eee 63 6 2 2 3 Digital 1 Q Output Settings sssssssssssssssseeeeeeemeene nnne nennen 65 6 2 2 4 Analog Baseband I
294. the trigger to frame the offset between trigger event and start of first captured frame CALC MARK FUNC CDP BTS RES TFR Result 0 00599987013 ms fenes Compensating a delay of the trigger event to the first captured frame Change the trigger offset to 100 us trigger to frame value TRIG HOLD 100 us Retrieve the trigger to frame value CALC MARK FUNC CDP BTS RES TFR Result 0 00599987013 ms Measurement 5 Measuring the Composite EVM a sasas Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Activate a TD SCDMA BTS measurement channel named BTSMeasurement INST CRE NEW BTDS BTSMeasurement 10 15 6 Programming Examples TD SCDMA BTS Set the reference level to 10 dBm DISP TRAC Y SCAL RLEV 10 Set the center frequency to 2 1175 GHz FREQ CENT 2 1175 GHz fesesesEE Configuring the measurement Set the trigger source to the external trigger TRIGGER INPUT connector TRIG SOUR EXT Replace the second measurement window Result Summary by Composite EVM evaluation LAY REPL 2 CEVM Optimize the scaling of the y axis for the Composite EVM measurement DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL AUTO ONCE f25eB Beesex Performing the measurement Stops continuous sweep INIT CONT OFF Sets the number of sweeps to be performed to 10 SWE COUN 10 Start a new measurement with 10 sweeps and wait for the end INIT WAI feassesssssss Retrieving results
295. tion Channels and Codes Modulation Number of bits per symbol QPSK 2 8PSK 3 16QAM 4 64QAM 6 Table 4 7 Number of bits per slot depending on modulation and spreading factor SF Modulation QPSK 8PSK 16QAM 64QAM Number of bits 16 88 132 176 264 8 176 264 352 528 4 352 528 704 1056 2 704 1056 1408 2112 1 1408 2112 2816 4224 Table 4 8 Channel parameters and their dependencies Spread Sym QPSK 8PSK 16QAM 64QAM ing Fac bols tor Slot Bits per ksps Bits per ksps Bits per ksps Bits per ksps Slot slot slot slot 1 704 1408 281 6 2112 422 4 2816 563 2 4224 844 8 2 352 704 140 8 1056 211 2 1408 281 6 2112 422 4 4 176 352 70 4 528 105 6 704 140 8 1056 211 2 8 88 176 35 2 264 52 8 352 70 4 528 105 6 16 44 88 17 6 132 26 4 176 35 2 264 52 8 Channel notation Channels are generally indicated by their channel number and spreading factor in the form lt Channel gt lt SF gt Selected codes and channels In the result displays that refer to channels the currently selected channel is highligh ted in the diagram You select a channel by entering a channel number and spreading factor in the Evaluation Range settings The specified channel is selected and marked in red in the corresponding result dis plays if active If no spreading factor is specified the spreading factor 16 is assumed For inacti
296. tion is 8 SENS CDP MSH 8 Synchronize to phase reference of midamble in slot SENS CDP STSL ON Allow for phase rotations between channels SENS CDP STSL ROT ON Power threshold for active channel is 10 dB compared to total signal SENS CDP ICTR 10 Automatic channel search for modulation up to 8PSK SENS CDP MMAX PSK8 CONF CDP CTAB OFF Programming Examples TD SCDMA BTS 95222 2 Defining the evaluation range and result displays Analyze slot 3 in set 0 SENS CDP SET 0 SENS CDP SLOT 3 Set code 3 for SF 16 as current code SENS CDP CODE 3 Define relative power values SENS CDP PDIS REL ff 59s9e9eeS Performing the measurement Stops continuous sweep INIT CONT OFF Sets the number of sweeps to be performed to 10 SWE COUN 10 Start a new measurement with 10 sweeps and wait for the end INIT WAI 92 2 Retrieving results Retrieve the relative code domain power CALC MARK FUNC CDP BTS RES CDPR Result 0 dB Retrieve the trace data of the code domain power measurement TRAC DATA TRACE1 Result 8 000000000 0 000000000 4 319848537 3 011176586 0 000000000 2 000000000 1 000000000 4 318360806 3 009688854 1 000000000 8 000000000 0 000000000 7 348078156E 001 7 217211151E 001 1 000000000 LE Wasted Select the external frequency from the REF INPUT 1 20 MHZ connector as a reference ROSC SOUR EXT10 Query the carrier freque
297. tive the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 117 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event 10 11 Importing and Exporting I Q Data and Results Importing and Exporting I Q Data and Results For details on importing and exporting I Q data see chapter 5 I Q Data Import and Export on page 48 MMEMOm LOAD IQ STAT E iriure nrbt ta se eroe Yeh gna eta popu eo So cb gkeue so A REM dud 221 MMEMony S TORe lt n gt 10 COMMI ates rue etre Ipae AEEA 221 MMEMory S TORe n dQ STATe ir crar tas cocco a poi ne e vine ceu PATER AE N 221 MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command restores l Q data from a file The file extension is iq tar Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the source file Example MMEM LOAD IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Loads IQ data from the specified file Usage Setting only Manual operation See Q Import on page 49 MMEMory STORe n IQ COMMent Comment This command adds a comment to a file that contains I Q data The suffix n is irrelevant Parameters Comment String containing the comment Example MMEM STOR IQ COMM Device test 1b Creates a description for the export file
298. to several users or to a single user requiring a higher data rate This is a benefit especially when transmitting Internet data as usually more data is downloaded than uploaded Distributing the data in time also means the TD SCDMA standard can use the same carrier frequency for both uplink and downlink 4 2 Frames Subframes and Slots The structure of a typical TD SCDMA signal is shown in figure 4 1 A TD SCDMA signal is divided into frames with a length of 10 ms each The frames are further divided into 2 subframes with a length of 5 ms each For the physical com munication layer mostly the subframes are of interest Each subframe consists of 7 slots named TSO to TS6 plus a Downlink Pilot Time Slot DwPTS and an Uplink Pilot Time Slot UpPTS which are required to transmit synchronization codes Between the two synchronization areas a guard period of 75 us is inserted Each slot has a length of 0 675 ms The first slot TSO of a subframe is always reserved for downlink the second slot TS1 is always reserved for uplink The switching point indicates the time after which subsequent slots are available for downlink again The system is informed about the current location of the switching point by higher layers Frames Subframes and Slots Frame 10 ms M gt Subframe 1a Subframe 1b Bo I a I ED O Time slot 0 675 ms TTS ee TSO TS1 TS2 TS3 TS4 TS5 TS6 DL UL UL UL DL DL DL DwPTS
299. ture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant 10 13 0 Status Registers Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the Sweep INST SEL IQ ANALYZER Selects the IQ Analyzer channel INIT REFR Refreshes the display for the I Q Analyzer channel Usage Event Manual operation See Refresh on page 94 SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA mode not for the MSRA Master It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements Parameters Offset This parameter defines the time offset between the capture buf fer start and the start of the extracted application data The off set must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Range 0 to Record length RST 0 Manual operation See Capture Offset on page 81 Status Registers The following commands are required for the status reporting system specific to the TD SCDMA applications In addition the TD SCDMA applications also use the stand ard status registers of the R amp S FSW depending on the measurement type For details on the common R amp S FSW status registers refer to the description
300. turns the electronic attenuator on and off This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option It is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 72 Configuring Triggered Measurements The following commands are required to configure a triggered measurement in a remote environment The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 6 2 4 Trigger Settings on page 77 The OPC command should be used after commands that retrieve data so that subse quent commands to change the selected trigger source are held off until after the sweep is completed and the data has been returned 10 5 3 1 e Configuring the Triggering Conmdllons scued ceat tt rt rt bete 156 e Configuring the Trigger OUIpUt nen titer irre eie 161 Configuring the Triggering Conditions TRIGger SEQuenhce BBPowerHOLDoft 2 eeepc nacen eed oot etus 157 TRIGSer SEQuence sHOLDOM TIME aai oe rore toit eee e e inet ene erben eue ns 157 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff eese enne nnne 157 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYS TETES Saa rtr rte E Lender Roe cete eu randa 158 TRIGSer GEQuence EEVelBBPUOWEF ideo etit uu rb ee uou t enero nuo de dr ene Re FERE X RE REA 158 TRIGger SEQuenceJ LE
301. ual AIQ Analog Baseband signal only available with optional Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 For details on Analog Baseband input see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer User Manual RST RF Manual operation See Radio Frequency State on page 56 See Digital I Q Input State on page 58 See Analog Baseband Input State on page 60 Configuring Digital I Q Input and Output Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software always begin with SOURce EBOX Such commands are passed on from the R amp S FSW to the R amp S DiglConf automatically which then configures the R amp S EX IQ BOX via the USB connection All remote commands available for configuration via the R amp S DiglConf software are described in the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Example 1 SOURce EBOX RST SOURce EBOX IDN Result Rohde amp Schwarz DiglConf 02 05 436 Build 47 Example 2 SOURCe EBOX USER CLOCk REFerence FREQuency 5MHZ Defines the frequency value of the reference clock Configuring Code Domain Analysis Remote commands exclusive to digital I Q data input and output l zuasj eusib it C 139 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO tort ectetur eoo ertet erect reae une 140 I PubtbIO RANGE COUDDPIFIg coetu prt re Do eene sates e ht nen Eye ER eae ns cae entr eno 140 INPu
302. uplicating remote ns Querying remote ceti ne ettet Renaming remote Replacing remote esee Measurement time Auto Settinigs citet a Destin ned 96 Measurement types CDA HQ 13 Frequency domialn nien baton tr cerea ra coats 30 Measurements Selecting Selecting remote Starting remote i ce tr s Microbutton PIOD6S o sere as cit welled notice 63 Mid1 2 see Midamble Power delta sssssssssss 16 Midamble Assighilmehlt inei erret en t p Pee 45 Er 45 Channel YPE i n cett entere 43 Common assignment soniri iiaea 45 Default assignment errem 45 Power delta channel table eee 17 Power delta displaying 5 18 Power offset to data fields 46 Power requirements 46 Shift channel detection Shift channel table ern e ees 17 Shift displaying teen merde 18 Shifts per cell a 85 91 SUMS DASICS emet perterriti ed 45 Shifts remote pre br As User specific assignment ccccceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 45 Minimum 2s 2 s 4417 Marker positioning 2117 NOX nisi nd col ES 76 MKR gt Key Lions i Rte ea Eden hacen N 116 Mobile station see UE user equipment ee eeceeeseeeeeteeeeeeeteeeeeeee 9 Modulation Channel detection Modulation ty
303. using the following devices and accessories e The R amp S FSW with Application Firmware R amp S FSW K76 TD SCDMA BTS e The Vector Signal Generator R amp S SMU with option R amp S SMU B45 digital stand ard 3GPP options R amp S SMU B20 and R amp S SMU B11 required e 1 coaxial cable 500 approx 1 m N connector e 1 coaxial cable 500 approx 1 m BNC connector Test setup 1 Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the input of the R amp S FSW 2 Connect the reference input REF INPUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW to the reference input REF on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU coaxial cable with BNC connectors 3 Connect the external trigger input of the R amp S FSW TRIGGER INPUT to the exter nal trigger output of the R amp S SMU TRIGOUT1 of PAR DATA Programming Examples TD SCDMA BTS Settings on the R amp S SMU Setting Value Preset Frequency 2 1175 GHz Level 0 dBm Digital standard TDSCDMA 3GPP Link direction DOWN FORWARD Test model DPCCH DPDCH960ksps User equipment UE 1 Digital standard State ON Scrambling code 0000 The following measurements are described e Measurement 1 Measuring the Signal Channel Power sssssssssss 229 e Measurement 2 Determining the Spectrum Emission Mask 230 e Measurement 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power e Measurement 4 Triggered Measurement of Rel
304. ve unused channels the code on the basis of the spreading factor 16 is highlighted 4 4 Data Fields and Midambles Example Enter 4 8 Channel 4 is marked at spreading factor 8 35 2 ksps if the channel is active other wise code 7 at spreading factor 16 Data Fields and Midambles Each slot consists of 864 chips of which 704 are used to transmit data The data is divided into two data fields with 352 chips each The midamble consisting of the remaining 144 chips is located between the two data fields A guard period of 16 chips completes the slot Time slot TSx 0 675 ms 864 chips Data field 1 Midamble Data field 2 GP 352 chips 144 chips 352 chips 16 chips Fig 4 2 TD SCDMA slot structure Midamble shifts The midamble is a known symbol sequence which can be used to synchronize the sig nal in the slot and to distinguish the data from individual users in a single slot Different users can be separated by their different time shifts of the same basic midamble sequence For each midamble shift the known symbol sequence is rotated cyclically by a defined number of chips The maximum number of possible midamble shifts defines the maximum number of possible users in a single slot Each user is thus identified by a particular time slot and a particular code on a particu lar carrier frequency Midamble assignment A midamble is assigned to each code channel by the transmission side Different meth ods of as
305. weep zero span and Q data measurements Parameters Period Range Os to 10s RST 0s Example TRIG SOUR EXT Sets an external trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 81 Configuring Code Domain Analysis TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis which is only available for IF Power trig ger sources Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range 3 dB to 50 dB RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 81 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower Level This command sets the level of the baseband power trigger This command is available for the optional Digital Baseband Interface and the optional Analog Baseband Interface Parameters Level Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV BBP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 80 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port 1 trigger port 1 TRIGGER INPUT connector on front panel 2 trigger port 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on front panel 3 trigger port 3 TRIGGER3 INPUT OUTPUT connect
306. wer vs Slot PSYMbol Power vs Symbol RSUMmary Result Summary SCONst Symbol Constellation SEVM Symbol EVM SMERror Symbol Magnitude Error SPERror Symbol Phase Error Configuring the Result Display LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active windows in the active mea surement channel from top left to bottom right The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syntax lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Windowlndex_n gt Return values lt WindowName gt string Name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Windowlndex numeric value Index of the window Example LAY CAT Result At 2 1 1 Two windows are displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at the bottom or right Usage Query only LAYout IDENtify WINDow lt WindowName gt This command queries the index of a particular display window in the active measure ment channel Note to query the name of a particular window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify query Query parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window Return values lt WindowIndex gt Index number of the window Example LAY WIND IDEN 2 Queries the index of the result display named 2 Response 2 Usage Query only LAYout REMove WINDow lt WindowName gt This command removes a window from the
307. with a marker table Zooming into the Display Using the Single Zoom DISPlayiEWINDow sn gt ZOOMAREAS ia E EA AAKA a i aiaia 189 DISPIAVEWINDows nT ZOOM STA Torna ea aa A periere a 190 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 SSS aaa User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 189 R amp S FSW K76 K77 Remote Commands for TD SCDMA Measurements SSS eee 10 7 3 2 Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 97 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe State This command turns the zoom on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 97 See Restore Original Display on page 97 See Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 97 Using the Multiple Zoom DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA eese 190 DISPlay WINDow
308. y only See Code Domain Power on page 18 See Result Summary on page 27 CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime LIST RESult Queries the list evaluation results for Power vs Time measurements The results are a comma separated list containing the following values for each list range Return values lt RangeNo gt lt StartTime gt lt StopTime gt lt AverageDBM gt lt AverageDB gt lt MaxDBM gt lt MaxDB gt consecutive number of list range Start time of the individual list range Stop time of the individual list range Average power level in list range in dBm Average power level in list range in dB Maximum power level in list range in dBm Maximum power level in list range in dB Retrieving Results lt MinDBM gt Minimum power level in list range in dBm lt MinDB gt Minimum power level in list range in dB lt LimitCheck gt Result of limit check for the list range 0 Passed 1 Failed lt Reserved1 gt 0 currently not used lt Reserved2 gt 0 currently not used Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Time on page 31 10 9 2 Retrieving Trace Results The following commands describe how to retrieve the trace data from the CDA Note that for these measurements only 1 trace per window can be configured FORMat DATA lt Format gt This command selects the data format that is used for transmission of trace data from the R amp S FSW to the controlling computer Note that the command has no effec
309. y provide a better signal to noise ratio however When you switch off electronic attenuation the RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation was set to Thus the RF attenuation may be set to automatic mode and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator if possible Both the electronic and the mechanical attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value For the R amp S FSW85 the mechanical attenuation can be varied only in 10 dB steps If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed in the status bar Remote command INPut EATT STATe on page 156 INPut EATT AUTO on page 155 INPut EATT on page 155 Input Settings Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal as well User Manual 1173 9328 02 12 72 6 2 3 2 Code Domain Analysis The parameters Input Coupling and Impedance are identical to those in the Input settings See chapter 6 2 2 1 Input Source Settings on page 55 Preamplifier Input Settings If the optional Preamplifier hardware is installed a preamplifier can be activated for the RF input signal You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low input power This function is not available for input from the optional Dig
310. ype on page 114 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X Position This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the marker If the marker has been used as a delta marker the command turns it into a normal marker Parameters Position Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker Table on page 23 See Marker Peak List on page 39 See X value on page 114 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command turns all markers off Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event Manual operation See All Markers Off on page 114 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe lt State gt This command turns delta markers on and off If necessary the command activates the delta marker first No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 ON Turns on delta marker 2 Analysis Manual operation See Marker State on page 113 See Marker Type on page 114 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt AOFF This command turns all delta markers off lt m gt is irrelevant Example CALC DELT AOFF Turns all delta markers off Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X Position

R&S FSW-K76/-K77 TD-SCDMA User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S FSW-K76/-K77 TD-SCDMA User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S FSW-K76/-K77 TD-SCDMA User Manual